Home

6.24 - Command Alkon User Gateway

1. Start Delay Length of time in seconds the system waits before starting the conveyor belt Horn Blow Time Length of time in seconds the horn blows after Start Delay has completed Belt Clear Time Length of time in seconds typically required for a rock to travel from the beginning to the end of the belt Start Stop Pulse Duration of the pulse in seconds sent to the Start and Stop output addresses Start Browseable list of I O points for the Start output Stop Browseable list of I O points for the Stop output Horn Browseable list of I O points for the Horn output 02 09 10 101 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 EXTRA DEVICES The EXTRA DEVICES screen is used to set up extra devices such as a beeper to signal the end of a load As with many Spectrum screens you can go directly to other related screens from this one For instance you can press F4 to go to the I O Assignments screen or F6 to go to the Feed Destinations screen Extra Devices Screen Keyboard Hold Start Limit Allow Early Feed Stop Limit Pulse Mode Start Ignore Hold Stop Repeat Pulse Start Delay Seconds Pulse Time Seconds Interface Device Clear Time Seconds External Interface aterial Code Type Display Order FIELDS FELD DESCRIPTION Code Browseable list of extra devices Name Description of the extra device Keyboard Hold Browseable list of function keys The
2. FIELD DESCRIPTION Group Code Attaches the material to the appropriate material group Required for new ingredients Controls colors calculations and batching orders Standard groups are 1 AGG 2 CEM 3 WAT 4 ADX and 5 WATADX Auxiliary Group Secondary material group for the ingredient Inventory Level N means to display inventory by Bin Tank Silo Y means to display inventory by Plant S means to display inventory System Wide Scale Over Zero Ticket Group Attaches the ingredient to a ticket group This controls the printing order of the material For example ingredients in the AGG group will print before ingredients in the ADX group Aux2 Group Third material group for the ingredient Record SOZ as Normally this field should be set to N for No It should Batched only be set to Y for Yes in cases where bin or silo gates do not close all the way allowing small amounts of SOZ means material to leak into the scale between loads In such cases setting this field to Y allows the leaked material to be included in inventory usage for the next load Note This method of compensating for leaking gates should only be used temporarily It is preferred that the gates be repaired Based on Factor Used with the Based On field Tells the system what factor to use if the target weight of this material is based on another material Example To batch one unit of this material per 100 weight of c
3. is displayed in the scale s Weight column if the scale s load cell is bad 207 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 Graph Screen showing Discharge RUN DISCH Size Seq Runs 1 Load s Slump Batch 1 1 653 651 Batched Mixer 1 2 CR GR 0618 SAND 6615 1 CR GR 3745 COLD 122 3 118 1 BOTTLE 1 BOTTLE 2 BOTTLEO3 BOTTLE 4 e The RUN and DISCH function key prompts at the top of the screen appear in white until discharge is complete e For each scale a colored bar moves from right to left across the bottom part of the screen to show the progress of discharge e An asterisk appears next to a scale or bottle name when that device is discharging 02 09 10 208 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 mw FIELDS GRAPH SCREEN D Mix code of the order load being batched Mix Size Load size for the order load being batched Sequence Sequence code to be used for feeding ingredients Truck Truck that will carry the order load being batched Slump Slump value of the order load being batched Batch Number of batches required to make the load e g 1 1 Loads Number of loads batched for the current day Batched Number of yards batched for the current day Material Code for each ingredient in the mix design Target Target based on the load size for each ingredient in the mix design Current Amount fed for each ingredient Increases as the ingr
4. Allow Early Feed Hold Feed Disable Drop Records Gate Closed Allow Fast Feed Auger Feed Gate 1 Allow Negative Preact Gate 2 Default Preact Gate 3 Preact Override Gate Close Plant Erraticness Vibrator Minimum to Fast Feed Extra Gate Shutoff Allow Jog Fast Batch Tolerance Maximum Number of Jogs Jog Weight Allow Timed Feed Jog Settle Time Maximum Number of Timed Feeds Jog Time Plant Erraticness Jog Time Override Minimum to Time Feed Jg Time Adjust 02 09 10 83 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 With the configuration shown in the previous screen example e Both Gates 1 and 2 fast feed until the amount left to feed is less than the Minimum to Fast Feed value 1500 lbs AND greater than the re calculated target minus Plant Erraticness for Timed Feed Then Timed Feed starts for Gate 1 and Gate 2 closes e Gate time feeds until the amount left to feed is less than the Minimum to Time Feed value 750 lbs AND less than the re calculated target minus Plant Erraticness for Timed Feed Then Jog Feed starts for Gate 1 e Gates jog feeds until the amount left to feed is less than the Jog Weight value jogging ignores scale readings Gate 1 closes Note Gate 3 is typically used to turn on Aeration for Cement feeds Manual Material Monitoring is not tracked for Gate 3 02 09 10 84 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 SCALES SCREEN After configuring bins and silos you should set up your scales Thi
5. May 3 2004 Final proof for print vendor November 16 2004 Added appendices to the PDF for the print vendor March 16 2005 Updated the manual for V6 21A see New Features for a list of features added to this guide March 17 2005 Updated descriptions for Fast Timed and Jog feed types March 21 2005 Corrected description of Jog Feed and reviewed final proof for print vendor May 9 2006 Added feature enhancements for V6 22A and V6 22B Moved the section on setting up a serial scale to the External Serial Device Setup Guide December 20 2006 Re posted manual on Command Alkon website January 5 2007 e Updated the manual with the following feature enhancement for V6 23A The Batch Weight Options screen now includes a flag called Print Batched UOM that must be set to Y for state inspections so that printed scale or meter values use the same UOM as their respective measuring devices e Added a section to the Introduction about regulatory compliance with Mn DOT and CTEP state inspection requirements July 31 2007 e Revised description of the Allow Link Mix Conversion field of the System Defaults screen to require that this flag be set to Y e Prepared new V6 23 masters for the print vendor August 14 2007 Added CTEP approval number 5534 07 to page 10 July 10 2008 Replaced all instances of Zip disk with USB removable device Change is eff
6. Mix design based on the Entry unit of measure Maximum Allowed In Maximum amount of the ingredient allowed in a mix Mix design based on the Entry unit of measure Minimum Auto Minimum moisture percentage reading allowed from the Moisture probe Minimum that can be entered manually Manual or Automatic Maximum Auto Maximum moisture percentage reading allowed from the Moisture probe Maximum that can be entered manually Manual or Automatic 02 09 10 37 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 FIELD Use Positive Tare DESCRIPTION Works in conjunction with the Zero Tolerance Over field on the SCALES screen If you enter a Y in this field the system accepts any positive tare amount under the established tolerance If you enter an N in this field the system always uses a zero tare value even if a positive weight exists Example Tolerance is set at 20 pounds Target weight is 100 pounds The scale registers a 15 pound positive tare For a Y value the system dumps 85 pounds of material onto the scale For an N value the system dumps 100 pounds of material onto the scale Use Over Positive Tare Works in conjunction with the Zero Tolerance Over field on the SCALES screen If you enter a Y in this field the system accepts any positive tare amount over the established tolerance If you enter an N in this field the system always uses a zero tare value even if a positive weight exists Example Tolera
7. Quick EDIT On this screen you can create and edit macros to be used in Custom Equations and Sequences For example the CEMSTR macro in the example below can be used in a sequence where 10 percent of the aggregate is to be fed before the cement starts The benefit of using a macro is that you can use it several places in custom equations and sequences but only have to change its value in one place on the Quick Edit screen Quick Edit Screen Plant Name Il re FIELDS FIELD DESCRIPTION Plant Name Browseable list of plants Code Name assigned to the macro Cannot be the same name as a global I O or a step label in a sequence Value Amount or percentage associated with the macro Description Literal description of the macro mw FUNCTION KEYS FUNCTION KEY PURPOSE F1 Save To save data you have entered or changed F2 Browse To pull up a list of possible entries Browseable fields have these brackets FS Ins Ln Inserts a blank row above the current one F6 Del Ln Deletes the current row F7 Clear Clears all data from the screen Be careful about using this function 02 09 10 228 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 MATERIAL OVERVIEW Once you have set up your plant bins scales destinations etc you can control material bin assignments and feed discharge parameters from one screen the MATERIAL OVERVIEW screen You can use this scr
8. of an ingredient for the batch currently on the BATCH SETUP screen This is often done to change the amount of a chemical e g calcium in a mix design This changes the target amount for one unit 1 cubic yard 02 09 10 195 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 or meter As soon as you make this change the target amount of this ingredient for the load is also updated To change a target amount 1 Press ENTER until the Amount field for the ingredient whose target you wish to adjust is highlighted 2 Type the desired target amount for one unit 1 cubic yard or meter 3 Press ENTER The target amount of the ingredient for the entire batch is updated as shown in the Target field A red appears directly to the right of the Amount value to indicate that a manual change was made Note If the Modify Flag field of the Ingredients screen is set to N for a particular ingredient the target for that ingredient cannot be modified on the BATCH SETUP screen The Amount values for ingredients locked in this manner are highlighted in yellow gt ADJUSTMENTS TO WATER Adjustments to the Slump In Truck and Trim fields all have an affect on the amount of water in the mix design These adjustments are discussed next To Change Mix Slump 1 On the BATCH SETUP screen press TAB until the Slump field is highlighted 2 Type the desired slump value and press ENTER The Target value of the water ingredient changes ba
9. Calculated absorbed water in the mix per yd3 or m3 FREE MST Calculated free water in the mix per yd3 or m3 TICKET SCRIPT NAME S Ticket scripts to be used for the selected plant This entry overrides the base scripts for the company For more information see the description for the Ticket Script Name s field in the table titled Fields Printer Setup Screen 02 09 10 218 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 TEM System Messages DESCRIPTION Auto HH MM SS Manual HH MM SS SIMULATED Batch was run in simulator mode NON SIMULATED An actual batch was run NUM BATCHES Number of batches need to complete the load The following scenarios determine when these fields are displayed If Manual Power is turned OFF during a batch Auto HH MM SS and Manual HH MM SS both show the Load Start Time If Manual Power ON at batch start and left ON Auto HH MM SS and Manual HH MM SS both show the Load Start Time If Manual Power is turned ON during a batch Auto HH MM SS is not displayed Manual HH MM SS shows the time Manual Power was turned on If Manual Power is OFF at batch start and left OFF Auto HH MM SS and Manual HH MM SS are both not displayed Note If the Print Manual Auto option is set to Yes on the Batch Weight Options screen the name and amount of the manually fed material is printed with the batch weights LOAD TOTAL Total load weight DES
10. Cus Cus Acc Acc Use Tax Ret C 0 Add Add P O Field Browse List ILKON ALKON CORP JOHNSON JOHNSON BUILDERS LINS00 LINDSEY CONST MUR140 MURDOCK HOMES PUT225 PUTNAM CITY BAPTIST CHURCH Slink John H Slink Building City State County Zip Postal Code Contact Name Phone Number Notes SHORTCUTS e To move to the next page of a browse list press PAGE DOWN to move to the previous page press PAGE UP e To move to the end of a browse list press END to move to the beginning of a browse list press HOME e Incremental Search After pressing F2 you can type the first letter of the entry you want from the list When the browse list appears the first entry beginning with that letter is highlighted To get even closer to the desired entry you can type the second letter then the third and so on 02 09 10 23 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 ACCESSING FIELD HELP Additional information is available online for many fields To access online help for a non browseable field select the desired field and press F2 To access online help for a browseable field select the desired field and press F2 two times If no online help exists for the selected field the system displays a message stating that no online help is available EXI TI NG MENUS AND SCREENS To exit a menu or a screen press ESC This method of exiting removes menus and screens sequentially until you get to the MAI
11. Pulls up a list of possible entries Browseable fields have these brackets F3 Ingred F4 Convert Shortcut to the INGREDIENTS screen Standard to Metric and vice versa F5 Insert Inserts a line in the Ingredients section The new line is Converts the ingredients units of measure from U S inserted above the line currently selected F6 Del Line Deletes a line in the Ingredients section The line currently selected is deleted F7 Clear F8 Delete Cancels changes before you have saved them Deletes the mix design currently displayed When prompted press this key again to confirm 02 09 10 54 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 TO CREATE AN ADMIX DESIGN 1 Access the ADMIX DESIGNS screen 2 In the Admix Code field type the code for the mix design you are creating 3 Press ENTER to move to the Description field and type the full name of the admix design 4 Press ENTER to move to the Ingredients section NOTE Typically only one admix is entered If however more than one ingredient is entered the order in which the ingredients are listed is important The system batches ingredients in the order they are listed on the ADMIX DESIGNS screen from top to bottom 5 Type the code for the first ingredient on the top line of the Ingredients section Or browse the ingredients list highlight the desired ingredient and press ENTER to insert the
12. s Guide Ver 6 24 TOLERANCE ERROR SYMBOLS Any or all of the symbols described below can appear on batch weight reports and on load tickets These symbols indicate the type of tolerance errors that occurred during a batch These symbols let the reader know if the material was out of tolerance over or under tolerance and whether re trying the scale read had any effect on the tolerance error The absence of these symbols means that no tolerance error occurred Asterisk Indicates that the material was either under or over tolerance on the first scale reading and that the operator pressed F6 Retry from the error pop to re read the scale Also means that the new scale reading was for whatever reason back in tolerance Plus Indicates that the material went over tolerance and that the operator did not press F6 Retry from the error pop to re read the scale Minus Indicates that the material went under tolerance and that the operator did not press F6 Retry from the error pop to re read the scale Greater Than gt Indicates that the material went over tolerance and that the operator pressed F6 Retry at least once from the error pop but the value re read from the scale was still out of tolerance Less Than lt Indicates that the material went under tolerance and that the operator pressed F6 Retry at least once from the error pop but the value re read from the scale was stil
13. 175 02 09 10 298 P Percentage Ingredients 43 PORT PARAMETERS SCREEN 150 Power Up Procedure 18 Preact 170 Printer Setup Screen 143 Printing Multi Batch Printing 146 Printer Setup 150 Reports 238 Reprinting Tickets 216 Tickets 212 Project Pricing 67 Projects Screen 64 Property Sets 110 Q Quick Edit Screen 228 Quick Load Feature 224 Quick Ticket Feature 226 Quit Spectrum Procedure 20 R Record definition 14 Reports 238 Cancel Printing 239 Reprinting Tickets 216 Resale Products Screen 57 S Sales Tax Rates Screen 32 Scales Screen 85 Screen Layout 27 Screens Accessing 21 Exiting 24 Field Help 24 Moving from Field to Field 22 Selecting a Field 22 Selecting Entries from Browseable Fields 23 Shutdown Procedure 20 Shutdown Without Running End of Processes 278 Slump 70 Slump Table 70 Slurry Calculations 128 Starting Discharge 211 System Defaults 119 T Ticket sample 213 Ticket Alias File 135 137 Ticket Editing 215 Ticket Layout Editor Screen 132 Ticket Printing 212 Ticket Reports 216 Ticket Scripts 139 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 Timed Feed 81 171 U Tolerance Error Symbols 214 221 Truck Washout 232 Ulink Style Admix Modifiers 56 Trucks Screen 62 User s Guide Terminology 13 Users 165 02 09 10 299
14. 2000 CUSTOMERS ALKON CORP BILLING ADDRESS LINE NUMBER 1 BILLING ADDRESS LINE NUMBER 2 PO BOX DUBLIN OH CONTACT NAME CON PHN NUMB NOTES FIELD ACCOUNT NUMBER Evans Building 143 South High Ralston Mr John Evans 614 234 8585 39484020 LINDSEY CONST MURDOCK HOMES 43017 253 Account Status STATUS Account Balance 1304 77 Discount Code DISCOUNT Tax Zone TAX COD Y Print Prices Y Account Status Account Balance Discount Code Tax Zone 5907 COD SY Print Prices Y 5697 37 Account Status Account Balance Discount Code Tax Zone COD Print Prices Account Status Account Balance Discount Code Tax Zone COD Print Prices Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 CURRENT ORDERS Enter the status or orders to be included in the report N Normal C Cancelled E Ended H Held W Will Call Thursday March 23 2000 CURRENT ORDER REPORT BY ORDER TYPE CODE PLANT CUSTOMER 27 00 yd Evans Buil 08 09 AMERICAN WAY PSI BACKING 1900 01 LIN500 09 29 60 00 yd 20 00 yd LINDSEY CO 09 09 AMERICAN WAY SIDEWALK 2000 MUR140 0329 60 00 yd 30 00 yd MURDOCK HO 10 09 PLEASANT PL PSI SLABS 2028 02 09 10 254 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 ALL ORDERS Tomorrow s Yesterday s Future and Past Order reports are not shown because they have the same layout as the All Orders report Thursday March 23 2000 12 16 ERE ORDER REPORT MAA for Tuesday
15. BATCH WEIGHTS TO QC HELPER 2 The Drive field is selected with A as the default entry Possible entries from the browse list are First DOS Floppy Second DOS Floppy First DOS Hard Disk Second DOS Hard Disk QNX Directory Winlink Directory USB Removable Device BeOUae gt Select the appropriate drive and press ENTER The cursor moves to the Start Date field 02 09 10 290 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 3 02 09 10 Select the Start Date The default is today s date You can browse for dates with batch weights Press ENTER The cursor moves to the End Date field Select the End Date The default is today s date You can browse for dates with batch weights Press ENTER The cursor moves to the Mat File Script field Enter the material file script file where batch weights data is stored in the Spectrum The default is mat_file x To export load level batch weights enter mat_file_by_load x Press ENTER The cursor moves to the File Name field Enter the name of the file to which batch weights will be exported The default is mat_rec dat Press ENTER The cursor moves to the Directory field Remember DOS file names can only have 8 characters a period then a 3 character extension Enter the directory to which batch weights will be copied The default is the 3 letter abbreviation for the current day of the week e g Tue Note The browse list lets you choose from a list of 3 letter abbr
16. Browseable list of modes of operation for the Open and Close functions of this mixer There are two fields one for Open and one for Close The choices for each are O for offline M for Manual operator presses and holds down on the button T for Triggered operator presses and releases the button A for Automatic Retrigger Required after Hold Yes No field Y if the mixer is put on hold while tilting you must press the Tilt button after releasing the Hold button to resume tilting N if the mixer is put on hold while tilting the mixer will resume tilting once you release the Hold button Start Timer At Beginning of Load Yes No field Y means the timer starts when the first bit of material reaches the mixer N means the timer starts after all material has been loaded into the mixer Force Open During Used for a single action gate Works the same way as a Stop Mixer Time with Mixer Hold Discharge scale by holding the gate open during discharge and then releasing it Show Actual Mix Yes No field If you open the mixer before mix time Time expires do you want that time printed on the ticket or the original mix time Y means print the actual mix time on the ticket N means print the original mix time on the ticket Yes No field Y means the mixer timer stops counting when the mixer is put into hold N means the mixer timer keeps counting wh
17. December 14 1999 thru Saturday July 1 2000 ALKON CORP 03 3000 3 6 WRA 2000 PS PUT225 8 00 PUTNAM RIGHT OFF STATE ST 2500 PSI WALL FOO 2500SWL PUT225 0 00 PUTNAM A RIGHT OFF STATE ST 2500 PSI WALL FOO 2500SWL PUT225 a 8 00 PUTNAM a RIGHT OFF STAT 7 2500 PSI WALL 2500SWL 18 00 1900 60 AMERICAN WAY PSI BACKING LIN500 LINDSEY CO AMERICAN WAY SIDEWAL MUR140 MURDOCK HO PLEASANT PL FOR ALL PLANTS Will Call 02 09 10 255 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 SELECT ORDER DATES March 23 2000 has been selected for the following report Thursday March 23 2000 ORDER REPORT for Thursday March 23 2000 thru Thursday March 23 2000 NORM Evans Evans Buil AMERICAN WAY PSI BACKING NORM LIN500 LINDSEY CO AMERICAN WAY SIDEWALK NORM MUR140 MURDOCK HO PLEASANT PL PSI SLABS FOR ALL PLANTS Will Call END OF REPORT 02 09 10 256 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 LOADS BY ORDER Thursday March 23 2000 RER LOADS SUMMARIZED BY ORDER for Thursday March 23 2000 thru Thursday March 23 2000 Evans Building Supply Job name 10 FORENSIC PARK From Plant Leave Travel Wait 100 Delivered Averages Customer LINDSEY CONST Job name 10 FORENSIC From Plant Leave Travel Wait 10 00 yd 01 10 00 yd 01 Delivered 20 0 yd Averages Customer MURDOCK HOMES Job name MURDOCK CIRCLE From Plant Leave Tr
18. ENTER to bring that record to the screen 4 Press the F8 Delete key When prompted press this key again to confirm SCREENS NOT DISCUSSED IN THIS SECTION The following screens are not discussed in this section Rather they are discussed in other sections of this Guide or in one of the appendices Data Entry Screen Location in this Guide Update I nventory Inventory section Orders Batching Operations section Concrete Calculator Batching Operations section Batchbook Base Mix See Appendix D Batchbook Cement Mix See Appendix D 02 09 10 31 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 SALES TAX RATES Sales tax rates are stored in a database table and can be applied to product sales To access the SALES TAX RATES screen select MAIN MENU gt DATA ENTRY SALES TAX RATES The screen shown next appears Sales Tax Rates Screen FIELDS DESCRIPTION Tax Zone Contains the code assigned to the tax zone Tax Rate Contains the percentage of tax charged in the tax zone FUNCTION KEYS FUNCTION KEY F1 Save Saves data you have entered or changed F5 Ins Ln Inserts a new line above the line currently selected F6 Del Line Deletes the line currently selected F7 Clear Clears all data from the screen 02 09 10 32 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 CUSTOMERS Customer information is stored in the customer datab
19. F4 Create Pulls up a Quick Load Create box so you can enter an order without the Order Entry or Dispatch functions Only minimal information can be entered The quick load appears on the Load Index for batching This is used mostly with systems with Dispatch links See Quick Load for more information FS Legend Pulls up a box explaining the meaning of colors used on this screen F6 Edit Pulls up the selected order for editing You cannot change the Mix Code however FS Void Voids cancels the selected order Works for either batched or un batched orders 02 09 10 179 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 ORDER ENTRY SCREEN If you do not receive orders from a Dispatch system you must manually enter orders on the ORDER ENTRY screen which is accessed by selecting MAIN MENU DATA ENTRY ORDERS Hix Code Ordered Slump Load Size Notes Consistence P 0 Order Code Order Entry Screen Project Plant 011 Customer 1 On Job Time Job Spacing Time Addr Truck Type Order Status N No of Loads Ext Description Tax Zone C 0 D Contact Print Price Phone Number Batch Code Returned Mix Allowed re FIELDS DESCRIPTION Date Date for which the order was placed Defaults to the current date Order Code System generated field Each day order codes begin at 1 and then increase The order code i
20. FUNCTION KEY F1 Batch Setup Takes you directly to the BATCH SETUP screen Information for the highlighted order is automatically pulled onto this screen F2 Browse Pulls up a list of possible entries Browseable fields have these brackets F3 Ticket highlighted order F4 Today Returns you to the current day s orders if you are viewing Takes you directly to the QUICK TICKET screen for the orders for a past or future date F5 Resort Updates the Order Index with any new orders added via a remote terminal F6 Orders F7 Projects Takes you directly to the ORDER ENTRY screen If an order is highlighted when you press this key that order is displayed on the ORDER ENTRY screen Takes your directly to the PROJECTS screen F8 Menu Takes your directly to the DATA ENTRY MENU 02 09 10 177 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 Load Index Load Date 2054 4 00 2054 10 00 2054 8 00 2054 6 00 e Information that appears on this screen comes from a Dispatch system or from a COMMANDbatch system e You cannot change any information on this screen but you can change the order of unbatched loads by moving them up or down the list Press CTRL TY to move a load up Press CTRL Y to move a load down the list e The asterisk beside a mix code means that extra products were attached to the ticket e Tickets
21. For changing discharge parameters Tab over to the To column Press F3 to pull a subset of the appropriate screen Bins screen for feed parameters Scales screen for discharge parameters Make changes to the appropriate feed or discharge parameters Press F1 to save your changes Press ESC to return to the Material Overview screen 231 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 TRUCK WASHOUT This feature lets you create a water only mix design for washing out trucks The procedure below assumes that a washout WO sequence with skip discharge authorize set has been created It also assumes that items in the base sequence have been added to the WO sequence to defeat their functionality For example the step label BEEPER could be used to remove the V DIS_AUTH stop condition line so that the washout load will automatically discharge without authorization 1 Create a washout mix design that has inventory tracking disabled and that uses the WO sequence 2 Enter the mix code in the Washout Mix field of the System Defaults screen 3 Initiate Truck Washout using one of the following methods e From any Spectrum screen press ALT T to load the Batch Setup screen with the washout mix design for one unit load of the washout mix Press ALT T a second time to start the washout batch and display the Graph screen Discharge occurs automatically so when washout is complete you can escape out of the Graph
22. The new fields are Ext Description and Consistence Affected forms are Mix Designs Projects Orders Batch Setup and Ticket Editor 02 09 10 15 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 FEATURE Average Moisture Report DESCRIPTION This report is new It shows average monthly moisture for materials used for batching Both SSD and total moisture averages are shown The Average Moisture selection has been added to the menu for Inventory reports under the Reports Menu 6 20A End of Day End of Week Modifications You can now select the Average Moisture and Truck Production reports on the End of Day and End of Week Setup screens These reports will then be printed when the End of Day and End of Week processes are run 6 20A Spectrum I O Mapping Modified for Eagle Because Eagle counters are not defined by IO position Spectrum s digital IO mapping and counter mapping have been reworked to not use hard coded mapping Also Eagle scales and counters have been reworked so that a maximum of 32 can be defined 6 20A Can Now Use Batch level Variables as Global All devices used in a load have internal batch level variables of a specific pattern Example BINO has batch level variables BINO1_STAR BINO1_SCAL BINO1_ATAR etc If a global variable that matches a batch level variable is entered on the Custom Controls Editor the system now maps the value of the batch level varia
23. fields are used for this purpose Master Plant Code This field only appears if V for Virtual is selected in the Remote Plant field In this field select the master or real plant code 02 09 10 157 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 I NVENTORY OVERVIEW OF SPECTRUM I NVENTORY FUNCTIONS Spectrum provides access to inventory and usage data for all ingredients and products in the database The following table gives a quick overview of how to access this information NOTE Access information for ingredient inventory and usage data is not included in the table because it is discussed in detail in the remainder of this section Ingredient Inventory Levels Discussed in detail in this section Ingredient Usage Data Discussed in detail in this section Usage for a Single Mix Select MAIN MENU DATA ENTRY gt MIX Design DESIGNS Select a code Make sure the Inventory field is set to Y Press ENTER Usage data for the selected mix design appears in the lower right portion of the screen Usage for All Mix Designs Select MAIN MENU REPORTS gt MIX DESIGN LISTING and press ENTER The report is generated and sent to the printer Inventory For a Single Resale Product Select MAIN MENU gt DATA ENTRY RESALE PRODUCTS List of All Resale Products Select MAIN MENU REPORTS RESALE PRODUCT LISTING and press ENTER The list is generated and sent t
24. for Returned Mix later in this table You can change this amount Sequence Mixer Time Sequence code feed sequencing to be used Defaults in with the mix code but you can select another sequence code Appears only for sequences using a mixer Amount of time the mix must to stay in the mixer before it can be discharged into a truck Defaults to the mixer time set in MIX DESIGNS If no mixer time was set for the mix defaults to the mixer time set on the MIXERS screen Trim yd Amount of water to trim per yard negative or positive You can change this data Also used to increase water to add on the job Trim Load Amount of water to trim per load negative or positive You can change this data Also used to increase water to add on the job Batch Code You can select either a Y or B value Y instructs the system to print batch weights on tickets for this order B instructs the system to refrain from printing batch weights on tickets for this order Simulate Status One of these three values B Actual batch A batch of concrete will be created and inventory and delivered amounts will be affected by this batch S Simulated demo batch Concrete will not be created but inventory and delivered amounts will be affected T Training batch No concrete will be created and the inventory and delivered amounts will not be affected You can change this information Return Mix Mix Code
25. off and set aside for record purposes A sample ticket is shown on the next page 02 09 10 212 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 SAMPLE TICKET THE Sample Ticket Up To 5 Parts Available 5168 Blazer Parkway Dublin Ohio 43017 Printi i In ALKON coccoxarion maven rinting Starts 6 Lines Per In On Line 7 10 Characters Per In CUSTOMER NAME ADAMS HONE BUILDERS DELIVERY ADDRESS SAN FERNANDO RD P O BOX 12 FROM MCDONALD S AT 47 amp HERMIT 402 JEFFERSON AVENUE WEST TO 3RD LIGHT 22 TRUMP AVE COLUMBUS OH 43200 RED BRICK OFFICE BUILDING PURCHASE ORDER SALES ORDER TAX CREDIT AD 97576 0003 st coo 12342 1908023 pF LOAD QTY PRODUCT DESCRIPTION ORDERED DELIVERED UNIT PRICE AMOUNT 10 00 3500 3500 PSI W AIR amp REDUCER 500 08 50 00 45 85 458 50 10 00 2000 FIBER MESH 2 500 00 50 00 4 25 42 50 10 00 8202 SUPER PLASTICIZER 599 00 50 00 5 00 50 00 1 00 8100 BAG S OF RED DYE 50 00 5 00 22 75 22 75 10 00 9202 WINTER HEAT 500 00 50 00 5 00 50 00 LEAVE PLANT ARAIVE JOB SITE START DISCHARGE SUB TOTAL 623 75 DISCOUNT 2 00 TAK 34 31 TOTAL 658 06 This space is available for PREVIOUS TOTAL 3646 06 Custom Printing GRAND TOTAL 4304 12 Horizontal Perf 35 Lines TW From Bottom Of Ticket ei E BATCH DATA MATERIAL DESIGN QTY REQUIRED BATCHED VAR ABSP MOI
26. prompted press this key again to confirm INGREDIENT GROUPS When an ingredient is entered into the Spectrum database you must assign it to a group in the Group Code field of the INGREDIENTS screen The system can then perform calculations based on all ingredients within a group as opposed to a different calculation for each ingredient in the database The Group Code is a required field when entering a new ingredient The standard group codes are 02 09 10 42 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 1 AGG 2 CEM 3 WAT 4 ADX 5 WATADX IMPORTANT Always assign ingredients to the proper groups to ensure proper system calculations and grouping on tickets ABSOLUTE VALUE I NGREDIENTS Absolute value ingredients do not have their mix design target amounts based on the amount of another ingredient in the mix Aggregate ingredients usually fall into this category To make an ingredient an absolute value ingredient leave the Based On and Based On Factor fields blank PERCENTAGE NGREDI ENTS Percentage ingredients do have their mix design target amounts based on the amount of another ingredient in the mix This applies mostly to admixes To make an ingredient a percentage ingredient enter in the Based On field and a numeric value in the Based on Factor field Example Let s say we entered in the Based On field and 28 in the Based On Factor field for Calcium The in the Based On field tells
27. 00 Start Delay 10 00 Flow Start Delay Open Time At Start 08 Close Time At Start 00 Open Adjust Pulse Close Adjust Pulse Max Gate Close Time Gate Close Forced Vibrator On If Flow Below Serial Probe Port Save Page 11 TO 76 0 00 Sec lb Sec lb Sec Sec Sec Sec Sec Sec Sec Sec lb Sec Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 02 09 10 FIELDS FIELD DESCRIPTION PAGE 1 BINS SCREEN Code Browseable field containing a list of available bins Material Read only field showing the material assigned to this bin If this is the first time this bin has been configured this field would be blank Materials are assigned to bins on the MATERIAL ASSIGNMENTS screen Monitor Enabled Yes No field that allows disallows manual feeding of this material to be tracked and recorded Feed Rate Rate of material flow through the primary gate In the above example the feed rate is 800 lb sec Keyboard Hold Browseable field containing a list of function keys The one selected can be used on the Graph screen to hold this device from discharging Display Group Browseable field containing a list of group color numbers in which to display this device on the Graph screen These color numbers correspond to the colors selected for the Graph screen on the Batching Defaults screen Allow Early Feed Yes No field that activates deactivates freewheeling for this de
28. 116 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 FIELD DESCRIPTION KEYBOARD HOLD LABELS F1 Meaningful labels for the keyboard hold keys used on the F2 Graph screen can be assigned here Select them from F3 browseable lists or enter your own F4 NOTE The actual function keys used for holding bins scales bottles and other devices are designated on the F5 appropriate Plant Setup screens For instance the F6 keyboard hold for Agg feed is set on the Bins screen and the hold for Agg discharge is set on the Scales screen Normally F1 is used for Aggregate F2 for Cement F3 for Water and F4 for Admix GROUP DISPLAY COLOR 1 2 3 4 5 6 Colors in which groups of materials will be displayed on the Graph screen Each group number has a browseable list of colors Choose a color for each group Inspect Mode Yes No field that sets whether the system will run in Allowed Inspect Mode This requires that an INSPECT_OK I O point be defined Custom Equation Mode Activates deactivates custom equation processing software that emulates a PLC controller Choices are A for Activate O for Off Returned Mix Max Age Length of time in minutes a returned mix can be in the truck and still be used 50 Line Graph Screen Y means the Graph screen will be displayed with 50 rows N means the Graph screen will be displayed with 25 rows PAGE 2 BATCHING DEFAULTS SCREEN CEMENT T
29. 23 2000 thru Thursday March 23 2000 Plant 01 Active Units Total Wash Hours Per Hour Trips Units Load Down License Number Travel 0 20 45 83 1 9 00 0 9 0 0 20 0 0 36 27 59 L 10 00 20 8 0 0 20 0 210 53 Plant 01 Totals Average Minutes Per Delivery Percent of Times Spent 63 54 0 00 Company Totals 29 00 23 1 60 0 Average Minutes Per Delivery y secs T 20 0 10 0 Percent of Times Spent p 63 54 0 00 164 91 82 46 Productivity Summary Bes weeeeeee 47 82 yards per driver hour FEE END OF REPORT 0 0 0 0 02 09 10 268 Out Travel Capacity ERST 0 0 100 00 32 3 0 0 83 33 12 1 0 0 90 91 56 5 0 0 90 62 18 8 0 0 30 0 96 5 10 0 18 8 82 46 188 25 1 3 minutes per Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 TRUCK PRODUCTION REPORT Tuesday August 28 2001 TRUCK PRODUCTION REPORT FROM 08 27 2001 07 18 CUSTOMER PROJECT ORDER TICKET ADDRESS CODE NUMBER 08 27 2001 19 MUR140 1 0017 Johnson 08 27 2001 16 35 LIN500 08 27 2001 17 00 END OF REPORT 02 09 10 269 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 MANUAL MATERIAL MONITOR This report shows any events where material was manually batched Thursday March 23 2000 Manual Material Monitor Report Plant for Thursday March 23 2000 thru Thursday March 23 2000 Date 03 23 2000 Load Ingredient Bin Tank Amount System Restart 10 25 denotes Manual Feed w
30. 6 24 Ticket Script Name s DESCRIPTION Ticket script to be used for printing tickets Press F2 from this field to pull up two lists of flags Flags in the first list are replacement scripts You can type one of these flags directly before the script name Example t alkon y t top of the ticket script s w batch weights script s 1 log script s m mixer script s b batch weights to disk script s Flags in the second list determine when the top of the ticket will be printed You can type one of these flags directly after the script name Example t alkon y 5 3 print at LOAD START 6 print at LOAD MIX 4 print at LOAD WEIGH 7 print at LOAD DONE 5 print at LOAD DISCHARGE Only one numbered ticket print flag may be specified The default value is print at LOAD START Usually the default settings should not be changed The following flags can also be entered F forces the system to always prompt you for a truck code before starting discharge T causes the system to prompt you for a truck code before starting discharge only 1f the Truck field of the Batch Setup screen is blank Example t alkon y 5 F Set EPSON mode Y means use Epson printer emulation N means do not 02 09 10 145 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 MULTI BATCH PRINTING You can set the system to print batch weights for each weigh cycle of a multi batch load some states require this Thi
31. A S A E METERED BOIT DREE E EE E E E EE ETE E A E E A a eee ADMIXTURE BOTTLES iii its A AN ENET E A ESA RON NAO HOLDING LANKA ao co aa E AR EE SN RNE ttt ah ti abe sede ila tachi alah ata bbe teed tne gh Wadia as Ae tol of te ane an CONVEYOR BELTS ds JN E a a A a II O RA EXTRA DEVIGES sitiada tdi e ld o ao A e teen Assigning Materials to Bins amp Bottles omoommsmms 104 MATERIAL ASSIGNMENTS SCREEN ssssssssccececsssssaececececsesseaececececsenssaececeeccseneaseececececsesesaeeeeceecsessaasaeeees 104 To Assign Materials to a Device escccscssssssssssssssssesescststsesesesenesensnsasucucnsesseseseseaeseeeeenensenensnseaeas 104 G Fieldsa E AOS a Be AEE O 105 SS LPUNCHONAR CYS set isles rea ee e e nai 105 AUTO BIN SWITCHING cssecccccececesnsnsnccsccscesnsnsnecsecscessennnessesececssnseaseeeecsceensnaucesececsensnsuaceeescesssnnneseeescs 106 ONO 106 ODE ATION A A a E E EE A R 106 Ticket Printing for Switched Bits s cccccssssssssssssscscsesestscsesesesesesesesesesseeeceeeeseseseseseneneneaeensnaeas 107 Setting Feed Destinations esssesssesssocsoeossocecooscooessooosseoccosecoosesoessosessssecosesosessssessseessee LOO BEED DESTINATIONS SCREEN a tdo des 108 Rs A EN E E E E E NO 108 gt FUnchon Keyi atanena a R EE AE EEEREN es 109 DEVICE PROPERTE SETS E E E A ERA E E E R suascdvee testbasnnsetneateds 110 Adding a New Property Set ccccccscssssssssesesesesesesesesesessscnescnsssesesesesesesesseeesceceeeee
32. Adjustment per This is the only column you can edit on this table It Step contains the percentage of change in water needed to achieve the Slump Change in column 1 Amount of Change per Shows the amount of change for each step slump Step change value resulting from the percentage entered in column 2 This information is read only and is shown in gl for U S systems and L for SI Cumulative Change per Shows the total changes made against each step Step slump change value This information is read only and is shown in gl for U S systems and L for SI SETTING UP SLUMP TABLES 1 To use slump tables instead of the linear method of adjusting slump select MAIN MENU SYSTEM MAINTENANCE BATCHING DEFAULTS and enter Y in the Enable Slump Table field Press F1 to save your data 2 Select Main Menu Data Entry Slump Table to access the Slump Table editing screen shown above Enter a Slump Code and Description 4 Inthe Percent Adjustment per Step column enter the percentage of change desired for each increment or step of change It is recommended that you set up your tables something like the example given above A Press F1 to save your data 02 09 10 72 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 CALCULATING SLUMP USING SLUMP TABLES Water to Add Subtract Water Amt per Mix Unit Sum of Percentages 100 Where The percentages for each step used are added Water Amount per Mix Unit i
33. Browseable list of I O points for the Start input Stop Limit Browseable list of I O points for the Stop input Start Browseable list of I O points for the Start output Stop Browseable list of I O points for the Stop output Interface Device Reads data from an external source manual station display scale or counter or external serial device and stores the value for the externally added material External Interface Port parameter for the interface device Material Code Material that can be externally added and whose added amount is recorded by the external source Unit Unit of measure printed on tickets for data received from the extra device Type Device type C counter or S scale Display Order Order the extra device is displayed at the bottom of the Graph Screen with scales bottles and other devices 02 09 10 103 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 ASSIGNING MATERIALS TO BINS amp BOTTLES MATERIAL ASSIGNMENTS SCREEN After feed source and destinations have been set up and ingredients added to the database you can assign materials to bins and admixes to bottles To ASSIGN MATERIALS TO A DEVICE 1 From the Main Menu select Plant Setup gt Material Assignments The Material Assignments form appears Material Assignments Screen Plant Name II Device Type 2 Assign the material to the appropriate bins silos A
34. Enable Auto Travel Yes No field that sets whether a truck can automatically Status advance from the Washing Down to the Traveling to status Enable Auto On Job Yes No field that sets whether a truck can automatically Status advance from the Traveling to to the Waiting On Job status Enable Auto Yes No field that sets whether a truck can automatically advance from the Waiting On Job to the Unloading status Enable Auto Wash Out Yes No field that sets whether a truck can automatically Status advance from the Unloading to the Washing Out status Enable Auto Return Yes No field that sets whether a truck can automatically Status advance from the Washing Out to the Returning status 02 09 10 122 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 MATERIAL CALCULATIONS SCREEN CAUTION Only properly trained and authorized personnel should make entries on this screen Incorrect entries on this screen can result in bad batches OVERVIEW Material calculations define the manner in which mix design weights are converted to target batch weights Material calculations use material Groups with each material belonging to one or more Groups and each type of calculation being performed simultaneously on the entire Group Calculations are performed in the order listed on the MATERIAL CALCULATIONS screen and are independent of the order of ingredients in the mix
35. Phone Number Contact telephone number from the customer record for the customer attached to the project Order PO Required Indicator from the customer record that stipulates whether a Purchase Order is required for all orders Restrict Products Indicator from the customer record that stipulates if product deviation is allowed when a project is assigned to an order C O D Indicator from the customer record that stipulates if the customer is a credit or cash customer Print Prices Indicator from the customer record that stipulates if prices will be printed on delivery tickets 02 09 10 65 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 DESCRIPTION Return Mix Indicator from the customer record that stipulates if the Allowed customer will accept returned concrete NOTE If the Override Enabled field on the SYSTEM MAINTENANCE SYSTEM DEFAULTS screen is set to N the system uses the Returned Concrete flag from the customer record If however the Override Enabled field is set to Y you can override the Returned Concrete flag at batch time P O P O number that should be assigned to all orders in the project UDF 1 This user defined field may contain up to 20 characters The field label is also user defined on the SYSTEM MAINTENANCE SYSTEM DEFAULTS screen UDF 2 This user defined field may contain up to 20 characters The field label is al
36. Products screen must be set to Y and an ingredient must be selected in the Ingredient Alias field When a batch with the resale product is run the system deducts the resale amount from the alias ingredient s on hand amount The Resale Products Listing and the Resale Product Inventory Report not shown will not display an amount for the ingredient used as the resale product Rather they will display an asterisk followed by the alias ingredient name in the On Hand column Monday March 20 2000 kk RESALE PRODUCTS LISTING PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 519 WASHOUT CHARGE 516 HEATED MATERIALS CHARGE 512 FIBER MESH 510 SUPER PLASTICIZER 505 OVERTIME CHARGE 0532 CONVEYOR CHARGE SANDRESALE SAND SOLD SEPARATELY denotes that the on hand amount for the product is ingredient displayed x END OF REPORT 02 09 10 60 00 00 00 00 00 00 524 25 1b tracked in the 156 T25 308 84 288 SAND TCG Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 RECORDING INCOMING INVENTORY RESALE PRODUCTS 1 Select MAIN MENU DATA ENTRY RESALE PRODUCTS 2 Inthe Code field select the product for which you wish to record incoming inventory 3 Press F3 Incoming The window shown next appears with the cursor on the Adjustment Amount field Incoming Inventory Window Plant Ingredient 150 000 e 150 000 ea Adjustment Amount e Supplier Name Unit Factor Receipt Number Truck 1
37. TICKET LAYOUT EDITOR screen The Ticket Alias File appears 3 Move the cursor to the alias name you want to change 4 Type the new alias name and press ENTER 5 Press F1 to save the new alias 02 09 10 138 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 CREATING A NEW TICKET SCRIPT A ticket script controls what is printed on a load ticket as well as where it is printed Normally the top half of the ticket contains delivery information followed by product information The bottom half contains the batch weights A sample ticket is given at the end of this section To create a ticket script 1 Determine the order in which you wish information to be printed on load tickets Select MAIN MENU SYSTEM MAINTENANCE gt TICKET LAYOUT EDITOR A blank TICKET LAYOUT EDITOR screen appears In the of field at the top of the screen type the name of the new ticket script Press ENTER to move to the Action field Delivery Information Using the screen example on the next page as a guide do the following 4 From the Action field press F2 A list of valid actions appears Select the 02 09 10 desired action e g PRINT from the list and press ENTER That action appears in the Action field Press ENTER to move to the Column field Type the column number where you want this data to be printed on the ticket Press ENTER twice The cursor moves to the Data field From the Data field press F2
38. Unit Factor Hauler y Unit Factor On Hand 150 000 150 000 Used Used Used Used 4 Enter the amount of incoming inventory and any other pertinent information supplier truck hauler etc 5 Press F1 to save your entry and update this product s on hand amount 6 Press ESC to go back to the RESALE PRODUCTS screen Repeat Steps 2 through 5 above for each product for which you need to receive inventory 02 09 10 61 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 TRUCKS Information about trucks used to deliver concrete is stored in the Trucks database table This information is added edited and viewed on the TRUCKS screen To access this screen select MAIN MENU DATA ENTRY TRUCKS FIELDS Truck Screen Code Driver Hauler Charge Rate Capacity Home Plant In Use Truck Type Description License Plate Expiration Date DESCRIPTION Code Code assigned to the truck You may browse this field to see a list of resale products in the database Driver Name of driver assigned to the truck Hauler Name of the hauler if the truck is not company owned but rented or leased Charge Rate Percentage rate at which concrete should be discharged into the truck Capacity Maximum number of units the truck can haul Home Plant Plant code of the home plant for the truck In Use available i e in the shop for repairs and cannot be called Y means the truck is
39. User s Guide Ver 6 24 Ta 10 11 12 The cursor moves to the Slump field The default slump is displayed Press ENTER to accept this value or type the desired value and press ENTER The cursor moves to the Notes field Enter any notes that you want the batch plant operator to see and press ENTER The cursor moves to the Seq field Press ENTER to accept the default or select from the browse list the appropriate sequence code and press ENTER The cursor moves to the Ret d Amt field Enter the amount of returned concrete currently on the truck and press ENTER You may also just press ENTER to accept the default of zero in this field The cursor moves to the Plant field Press ENTER to accept the default or select the desired plant and press ENTER Press F1 to save the load The load is then displayed on the LOAD INDEX for the selected plant The load is displayed in red text until batched Then it is displayed in white w TO EDIT QUICK LOAD INFORMATION 1 2 On the LOAD INDEX screen select the load you want to edit and press F6 NOTE You cannot change the mix code or edit a load already batched Make the desired changes and press F1 to save your changes re TO BATCH A QUICK LOAD BATCH 1 02 09 10 On the LOAD INDEX screen select the load you want to batch and press F1 The BATCH SETUP screen appears Following the steps given in the Basic Steps for Automatic Batchin
40. Warning Note Exactly when this message appears depends on when tickets were set up to print in the Ticket Script Name s field of the Printer Setup screen By default tickets start to print at LOAD START meaning this warning message would pop up as soon as you pressed F9 to start the batch 5 Press F4 to clear the message then press ALT A to pull up the Assign Truck Code box 6 Arrow up or down to select the correct ticket Press F2 and select a truck code The driver name is pulled in when you select the truck code if a driver was assigned to the truck 7 Enter a driver name or edit the one that appears 8 Make sure Y is selected in the Verified column for the selected ticket An example of the completed Assign Truck Code box is shown next Assign Truck Code Box completed 9 Press F1 to save the information The ticket will then print or finish printing and will show the new or revised truck information Caution If you forget to verify the truck code the ticket will not print Y ou will have to go to the Edit Ticket screen to edit the truck information before the ticket will print See Editing the Truck Code After Discharge for more information 02 09 10 201 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 02 09 10 F Option in the Ticket Script This method can be used if you want the system to ALWAYS prompt you for a truck code Note If this method is used the ticket will n
41. Weight Options screen accessed by pressing F3 from the System Maintenance gt Printer Setup screen See Selecting Batch Weight Items for Printing for more information The following table describes most of the items that can be printed on batch weight reports and on tickets See Reports for an example of batch weight reports COMMON ITEMS ON BATCH WEIGHT REPORTS DESCRIPTION MATERIAL Name of the ingredient as entered in the Spectrum database SOURCE The first 10 characters of the Ingredient description DESIGN OD Amount of material needed to batch 1 cubic yard meter of ore the mix design DESIGN QTY DESIGN OD is printed for Oven Dry mixes DESIGN QTY is printed for SSD mixes Note Moisture in SSD Saturated Surface Dry materials ranges from 1 to 3 above Oven Dry SSD SSD Design weight ADJ T Adjusted SSD Design weight after moistures REQUIRED Amount of this material needed to batch this load For cement and flyash this value is equal to DESIGN QTY LOAD SIZE For aggregates and water the DESIGN QTY would be adjusted for moisture in the aggregate BATCHED Amount of this material actually batched VAR Amount the final target varies above or below the required amount Equal to BATCHED REQUIRED VAR Percentage the batched amount varies above or below the required amount Can be a negative value Equal to BATCHED REQUIRED REQUIRED 02 09 10 217 Spectrum User s
42. YE Y U WU WU U E OR AUE Y UEN WA U REET U y Record DESCRIPTION Database table where the data field is stored Field Formal name of the database field All fields available for printing are displayed in this column Alias Alias name assigned to the database field This is what you enter in the Data field of the TICKET LAYOUT EDITOR NOTE Default aliases are assigned to some fields For others you can assign your own You can change the alias for any field however Type A for alphanumeric string N for numeric decimal point I for numeric integer D for jam defined date yy Y for jam defined date yyyy C for condition 02 09 10 137 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 T for jam defined time 12h M for jam defined time 24h S for jam defined time minsec U_ for jam defined currency Len Length of the data field To ADD AN ALIAS NAME 1 Select MAIN MENU gt SYSTEM MAINTENANCE gt TICKET LAYOUT EDITOR 2 Press SHIFT F5 from the TICKET LAYOUT EDITOR screen The Ticket Alias File appears 3 Move the cursor to the database field for which you want to create an alias name Move the cursor to the Alias column for this database field 4 Type the alias name and press ENTER 5 Press F1 to save the alias t To CHANGE AN ALIAS NAME 1 Select MAIN MENU gt SYSTEM MAINTENANCE gt TICKET LAYOUT EDITOR 2 Press SHIFT F5 from the
43. Yes No field that enables disables DTR DSR hardware handshaking for this device DTR DSR stands for Data Terminal Ready Data Send Ready RTS Delay Length of time in milliseconds the PC sends a ready to send signal to the device Default is 250 milliseconds ms NOTE Set this time to less than the Timeout Delay otherwise the connection may be abruptly ended before all of the information has been transferred to the port device CTS Delay Length of time in milliseconds the device sends a clear to send signal to the PC Default is 250 milliseconds ms NOTE Set this time to less than the Timeout Delay otherwise the connection may be abruptly ended before all Browseable field Duplex setting for serial printers of the information has been transferred to the port device 02 09 10 153 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 DESCRIPTION Time Delay Length of time in milliseconds the sending device waits for the receiving device to respond before the sending device disconnects itself Default is 3000 ms NOTE Set this time higher than the RTS and CTS Delays otherwise the connection may be abruptly ended before all of the information has been transferred to the port device Dialing Retries Used only if Line Type is D for dial up line Number of times the system will attempt to dial the line if the previous attempt was unsuccessful Default is 2 Connect De
44. You can also adjust moisture and the truck s discharge rate Adjustments are only in effect as long as you do not exit the BATCH SETUP screen If you exit and re enter this screen you will have to re enter any adjustments Most adjustments you make on this screen do not change system records The exceptions are changes to moisture which update system moisture records IMPORTANT Itis highly recommended that you run batches from the BATCH SETUP screen only You can start batches from other Spectrum screens but you cannot see which order is currently active on the BATCH SETUP screen Two examples of the BATCH SETUP screen are given next one blank and the other with an order transferred onto it After that we describe the fields and function keys associated with this screen After that we discuss how to prepare batches with and without an order Then we talk about the adjustments you can make on this screen Batch Setup Screen blank Load ID Mix Code Load Size Slump SequencelN ruc i d 4 rim Loa In Truck Ret Qty Batch Code Simulate Status T 02 09 10 191 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 Mix Code Load Size Truck In Truck re FIELDS IELD Mix Code Batch Setup Screen with an Order Load ID Slump SequencelN A Trim if Load Ret Qty Batch Code Y Simulate Status T DESCRIPTION Mix code to be batched If the BATCH SETUP screen was accessed from either the
45. amount decreases the water in the same manner Example If you enter a 5 in this field for a 10 yard load the water target increases by 5 gallons gt ADJUSTMENTS TO MOISTURE 1 On the BATCH SETUP screen press F8 Moisture The Moistures box appears as shown next Moistures Box ent 1 CR GR BIN 2 o7 STONE BINO 1 BLEND C BINO4 GRAV BLEND BINOS SAND BINO3 2 Press TAB until the Moisture Percent field is highlighted for the ingredient whose moisture percentage you wish to change 3 Type the new moisture percentage and press ENTER Notes 02 09 10 197 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 The water target will only be adjusted if the ingredient whose moisture was adjusted is part of the mix design The Probe Active field indicates whether a moisture probe is being used for the ingredient or whether the initial probe reading is used Y N or S is displayed in this field o Y means a probe is used o N means a probe is not used o S means the system uses the probe reading taken at the beginning of the batch for the entire batch 4 Press F1 to save the data and exit the MOISTURES box The water target will be automatically adjusted based on the percentage you just entered 02 09 10 198 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 gt EDITING THE TRUCK CODE BEFORE DISCHARGE Besides selecting the truck code in the Truck field of the Batch Setup screen there are three other ways y
46. and Ext Desc fields as needed 5 Press F1 to save the record w TO COPY AN ORDER As a timesaver you can copy an order from the current or a previous date and save it for the current or a future date For simplicity s sake we will show how to copy an order from a previous date to use on the current date l 02 09 10 Select MAIN MENU DATA ENTRY ORDER Entry The cursor appears on the Order Code field Press SHIFT TAB to move to the previous date field Press F2 to pull up the list of order dates Select the appropriate date and press ENTER The selected date is entered in the date field and the cursor moves back to the Order Code field 187 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 02 09 10 4 O Gy i Press F2 to pull up the list of order codes Select the appropriate Order Code and press ENTER The order to be copied appears on the screen Press SHIFT TAB until the cursor is again on the first date field Enter today s date and press ENTER Enter a new Ordered amount and Load Size Press F1 to save the new order The order is saved with the next Order Code for today and added to today s ORDER INDEX 188 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 CONCRETE CALCULATOR SCREEN Use the Concrete Calculator as a quick way to determine cubic yards or meters of concrete the customer needs Enter the measurements the customer gives you on the CONCRETE CALCULATOR screen then
47. be configured Code Capacity Unit norae Rate Disa Mixers Screen Name Open Limit yd Close Limit Keyboard Hold Running i le Mixer Modes while Not Batching Hold Mixer Mode Open Close AZ Retrigger Required after Hold Start Timer At Beginning of Load Open Force Open During Discharge Close Show Actual Mix Time Stop Mixer Time with Mixer Hold Interface Device Serial Temper Port Mixing Time Percent of Mix Time in the First Mixer Partial Open Time Partial Open Pause Full Open Time L Mix Time Done Material Code Seconds Unit Complete Type Seconds Seconds Discharge Time Seconds Seconds Close Time Seconds FIELDS FIELD DESCRIPTION Code Browseable list of mixers Name Description of the mixer Capacity Unit Maximum capacity for this mixer in this unit of measure e g 10 00 cubic yards Charge Rate Percentage of the system discharge rate that this mixer can handle This percentage can be higher than the normal charging rate say 150 because mixers can accept material at a higher charge rate than trucks can Keyboard Hold Browseable list of function keys The one selected can be used on the Graph screen to hold this mixer Disable Mixer Modes Yes No field enables disables automatic mixer operation While Not Batching if a batch is not in progress 02 09 10 234 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 Mixer Mode Open Close DESCRIPTION
48. besides the ones specified in the Directory and File Name fields enter it here Press F1 to export the batch weights 277 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 PROPER SHUTDOWN WHEN EOD Is NoT RUN The system automatically shuts down at the end of an End of process If you shut down the Spectrum without performing an End of process always perform the proper shutdown procedure as explained below Never power off the computer unless you run an End of process or you perform the following shutdown procedure 1 Select MAIN MENU QUIT SPECTRUM A warning screen appears 2 Press F1 to acknowledge the warning The system begins the shutdown process this may take a few minutes The Spectrum system informs you when shutdown is complete 3 Turn off the power to the Spectrum computer 02 09 10 278 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 DISK UTILITIES From the DISK UTILITIES MENU you can back up and restore the database as well as format floppy disks and perform other specialized functions The options listed below are the only ones you should use They are discussed in this section The remaining options are either duplicated in the End Of processes or should only be used with the authorization of Command Alkon Support Services personnel e Floppy Removable Media Backup amp Restore e Hard Disk Backup amp Restore e Batch Weights Backup amp Restore e Export Tickets to DOS File
49. by pressing F11 from any Spectrum screen You can also do this as soon as you have pressed F9 to start a batch This arms the system to automatically start discharge as soon as all ingredients are weighed up Here are a few things to keep in mind e If you have to clear or accept any feeding errors you will have to press F11 again to resume discharge e Direct metered ingredients admixes and water start as soon as you press F11 e Make sure a truck is in place or the mixer is running and empty before you initiate discharge rs ABORTING BATCHES Press F7 twice to abort all loads currently queued up Press SHIFT F7 on any load other than the current load to abort that load as well as subsequent loads 02 09 10 211 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 TICKET PRINTING OVERVIEW Normally a load ticket is printed each time a batch is run Typically the top half of the ticket delivery address and product information is printed as soon as the batch starts weighing up As soon as the batch starts discharging batch weight information and scale tares are printed The reason for this two part print process is as follows The top portion can be torn off as soon as it is printed and given to the driver This saves time because the batch operator doesn t have to wait for the entire ticket to be printed before he or she starts the next batch When the batch weight portion of the ticket is printed it can be torn
50. design This value is derived from the Specific Gravity numbers set up for the material in the INGREDIENTS screen This number can usually be obtained from your local supplier NOTE the total of the yields of all ingredients should equal 27 cubic feet Anything other than this signifies an incorrect mix design LMD Read only field Last Modified Date Shows date and user This field appears when an existing mix design is selected It is not present on the blank Mix Design screen Tot Yield Read only field Total yield for all ingredients Should not exceed 27 cubic feet see Yield field above Maximum Load Unit Maximum load size and unit of measure for the mix design Should equal the largest truck size entered on the BATCHING DEFAULTS screen NOTE Any Load Size on the BATCH SETUP screen greater than this value causes the system to split batch the load Sequence Code Browseable field that allows you to select the sequence of events for this mix design Because a default sequence code is established in the BATCHING DEFAULTS screen you only need to enter a sequence code for the mix design when it differs from the default Because of this the Sequence Code field is often left blank Sequence codes are most often entered for grout mixes and when you have a plant that is switching between wet and dry batching Slump Default The consistency to which the mix was designed This value is pulled onto the
51. discharge for the batch most recently started Across the top portion of the screen a colored bar for each material moves from left to right to indicate the progress of weigh up Colored bars at the bottom of the screen move from right to left to indicate the progress of discharge from scales and extra devices Two examples of this screen are given next one showing weigh up the other showing discharge After that we describe the fields and function keys associated with this screen 02 09 10 Graph Screen showing Weighup RUN Size Seq Slump Batch 1 1 Batched Mixer 1 Runs 1 Load s 3 651 652 BOTTLE 2 WAT SCALE 194 BOTTLE 3 BOTTLEO4 AGGREGATE 3880 BOTTLE 1 CEMENT 960 The RUN function key prompt at the top of the screen appears in white when you press F9 to start the batch For each ingredient a colored bar moves from left to right in the top portion of the screen to show the progress of feeding An asterisk appears next to a material name when that material is Fast Feeding A t appears next to a material name when that material is Time Feeding A j appears next to a material name when that material is Jogging If a scale non decumulative goes over capacity the entire system goes into Hold so the operator can determine whether to stop feeding into the scale before pressing F10 to take the system off Hold and continue batching Also OVER is displayed in red text in the scale s Weight column
52. following screen which appears when you select MAIN MENU SYSTEM MAINTENANCE DISK UTILITIES HARD DISK BACKUP amp RESTORE Backup amp Restore Hard Drive Operation Directory Files Directory Name To BACK UP TO HARD DISK 1 Select MAIN MENU SYSTEM MAINTENANCE DISK UTILITIES HARD DISK BACKUP amp RESTORE The above screen appears e A flashing message on this screen advises you to not continue unless other plants are idle The reason is that you could corrupt the database and seriously impede batching operations CAUTIONS e You should only use the Restore operation when directed to do so by Command Alkon Support Services personnel 2 The cursor is on the Operation field with Backup as the default entry Press ENTER to accept Backup and move the cursor to the Directory field 02 09 10 283 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 3 The default for the Directory field is Database Press ENTER to accept this value The cursor moves to the Files field 4 Select one of the following options from the browse list and press ENTER The entry appears in the Files field e All e Data Files e Customers e Mixes Ingredients Orders e Projects e Trucks 5 Press ENTER if you need to change the path and backup file name default is usr spec db bak Note When an End of Day process is run the database is automatically backed up to usr spec db bak 6 Press F1 to start the back
53. ingredient into this field 6 Press ENTER to move to the Absolute field If the ingredient is an Absolute Value ingredient type the absolute value per cubic yard in this field and press ENTER to enter the next ingredient If the ingredient is a Based On ingredient leave this field blank and press ENTER to move to the Based On field 7 In the Based On field type the numeric value you wish to associate with this Based On ingredient Press ENTER The cursor moves to the next ingredient line NOTES For Based On ingredients either or c is displayed in this field for percentage based e for hundred weight based This field is not accessible for Absolute Value ingredients The cursor moves to the next ingredient line instead 8 Continue adding ingredients in the order you want them batched 9 Complete the fields on the right side of the screen see the previous table for definitions of these fields Press F1 to save the new admix design record 02 09 10 55 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 ULINK STYLE ADMIX MODIFIERS If you receive mix designs from a dispatch computer via the Universal Link Ulink you can enter Ulink style admix modifiers as admix designs This kind of admix design is given a specific name so that it corresponds to a particular Ulink field i e admix code ULINK_092 would correspond to Ulink field 092 The following list shows the names that must be enter
54. list of possible entries Browseable fields have these brackets F4 Toggle To toggle back and forth between bin type and admix type devices Inserts a blank row above the current one F5 Ins Ln F6 Del Ln Deletes the current row F7 Clear Clears all data from the screen Be careful about using this function 02 09 10 105 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 AUTO BIN SWITCHING This feature causes the system to automatically select an alternate source without operator intervention when a feed timeout occurs SETUP 1 From the Main Menu select System Maintenance gt Batching Defaults The Batching Defaults screen appears Batching Defaults screen 17 46 Plant Name p E imum Load ES f Unit d Number of Feeds n Al lowed Auto Permanent Continu Trim Adjust h k Min in Truck Max in Truck ult h Discharge Default Enable Slump Table Minimum Default Base Admix Code 2 In the Bin Mapping section enter a Y in the Allowed field 3 In the Bin Mapping section enter a Y in the Auto field 4 Save your changes OPERATION When a feed timeout occurs the system checks for an alternate source for the material If an alternate source is available the remaining required material is fed from the alternate bin This happens without operator intervention If a feed timeout occurs and there are no remaining alternate feed sources the error po
55. lt lt lt lt lt lt lt ALKON TEST NUMBER 2 gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt PROJECT CODE SLINK1 CUSTOMER CODE Slink NAME STATE JOB NAME John H Slink Building ADDRESS SAME AS CUSTOMER ACCOUNT 3994292 END DATE 09 27 1999 LAST DATE 09 22 1999 1 3 6 STATE CURB BACK 100 00 yd END OF REPORT 02 09 10 259 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 PROJECTS BY CUSTOMER Thursday March 23 2000 PROJECTS BY CUSTOMER ALKON CORP ACCOUNT NUMBER PROJECT CODE PROJECT NAME PROJECT ADDRESS PROJECT PROJECT NAME gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt ADDRESS gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt PRODUCT PRODUCT DESCRIPTION PROJECTED DELIVERED lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt ALKON TEST NUMBER 1 gt gt gt gt gt gt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt ALKON TEST NUMBER 2 gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt 3994292 PROJECT CODE PROJECT NAME PROJECT ADDRESS SLINK1 STATE JOB SAME AS CUSTOMER PRODUCT PRODUCT DESCRIPTION PROJECTED DELIVERED 1 3 6 STATE CURB BACK END OF REPORT 02 09 10 260 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 EXPIRED PROJECTS Thursday March 23 2000 EA PROJECTS BY END DATE Date Thursday March 23 2000 04 13 1998 PROJECT PROJECT NAME gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt ADDRESS gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt ALKON CORP ACCOUNT NUMBER SLINK1 STA
56. material can be stored in multiple bins one or more of which can be currently active 3 Save your data e In the above screen example material 2 CR GR is assigned to Bins 5 and 6 Bin 6 is inactive meaning the system will feed from Bin 5 when this material is used If both bins were enabled the system would feed from both bins e To assign liquid materials to bottles press lt F4 gt and liquid devices and their assigned materials are displayed 02 09 10 104 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 FIELDS FIELD DESCRIPTION Plant Browseable list of plants Device Type Read only field showing either B for Bins or L for Liquids Defaults to B Press F4 to toggle back and forth between bin type and liquid type devices Device Browseable list of bins or admixes For bin type devices this list shows only bins and silos For liquid type devices this list shows only admixes Material Browseable list of all ingredients in the system Enabled Yes No field for activating deactivating the bin or admix tank Moisture On Yes No field for allowing disallowing moisture adjustment calculation for this material Low Inventory When the actual inventory reaches the amount listed here the material name is displayed in red on the Batch Setup screen FUNCTION KEYS FUNCTION KEY PURPOSE F1 Save To save data you have entered or changed F2 Browse To pull up a
57. number of days specified on the SYSTEM DEFAULTS screen a message to this effect is displayed on the bottom half of the End of Day Procedure screen If you do not back up batch weights 10 days after this default deadline the system automatically backs them up 02 09 10 274 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 mw FUNCTION KEYS THE END OF DAY PROCEDURE SCREEN 02 09 10 FUNCTION KEY F1 Start PURPOSE Initiates the End Of process F3 Reports Takes you directly to the REPORTS MENU F4 Utilities Takes you directly to the DISK UTILITIES MENU F5 Format format a disk please see Format Disks F6 Setup Lets you select a category End of Day End of Week End Allows you to format a floppy disk NOTE Before you of Month or End of Year to set up 275 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 EXPORTING BATCH WEIGHTS TO QC HELPER This utility lets you transfer batch weight information to Command Alkon s QC Helper to a Microsoft Windows quality control program or to a QNX disk Export Batch Weights Screen Drive Start Date End Date Mat File Script File Name Directory Full Path and File Name To EXPORT BATCH WEIGHTS 1 02 09 10 Select MAIN MENU SYSTEM MAINTENANCE DISK UTILITIES EXPORT BATCH WEIGHTS TO QC HELPER The Drive field is selected with A as the default entry Possible entries from the browse list are Fi
58. of the 2 queued load is displayed in a cyan color at the top of the Graph screen The 3 load number is displayed in dark blue gt If error pops appear for any batch you must press F11 again to reset discharge authorization 223 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 Quick LOAD The Quick Load feature lets you enter minimal load information without using the ORDER ENTRY screen or waiting for the Dispatch link to send a new ticket It is used mostly with Dispatch links The quick load appears on the LOAD INDEX screen as soon as you save it When the quick load is batched a ticket is generated but there is no customer or delivery information However you can add a short note to the quick load to be printed on the ticket rm TO CREATE LOAD I NFORMATION USING QUICK LOAD 1 Select MAIN MENU LOAD INDEX 2 Press F4 Create The screen shown next appears Quick Load Screen Load Date Load Truck Hix ES Load Time Code Code Size i fl Slump Notes Seq in Ret d Amt Plant 3 The cursor is on the Load Time field Type the desired load time or press ENTER to accept the current time 4 The cursor moves to the Truck Code field Select the desired truck and press ENTER 5 The cursor moves to the Mix Code field Select the desired mix code for that ticket and press ENTER 6 The cursor moves to the Load Size field Type the load size and press ENTER 02 09 10 224 Spectrum
59. of the returned concrete This field appears only if the Ret Qty value is greater than zero You can edit this information NOTE If the mix code of the returned concrete is incompatible with the mix to be batched a Warning box pops up You can press F4 to clear this box Age Number of minutes returned mix has been in the truck This field is visible only if the Ret Qty value is greater than zero You can edit this information Ingredient Read only field Lists each ingredient in the mix design 193 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 DESCRIPTION mw FUNCTION KEYS Amount Target amount per cubic yd m3 for each ingredient You can change this information The amount under the Target column is updated to accordingly Also a red ff sign appears beside the changed amount Target Read only field Total target amount for the load Equals the amount per cubic yd m3 multiplied by the load size plus any calculations for moisture water correction etc Customer change this data but whatever you enter will be printed on the load ticket Job If the load is associated with a project the job name is displayed If no job exists the customer name is displayed You can change this data but whatever you enter will be Customer for whom the load is being batched You can printed on the load ticket Notes Notes entered against the order or project You can change this data bu
60. parameters need to be entered The two screens used for these purposes are the BATCHING DEFAULTS and SYSTEM DEFAULTS screens These two screens are discussed in this section BATCHING DEFAULTS SCREEN On this screen 2 pages shown next you can enter or modify default settings that affect batching operations Important among these settings are maximum load size default slump and keyboard holds Batching Defaults Screen Page 1 Number of Feeds o Allowed Auto Permanent Default Batch 1 ault Simu Adjust k s Simulated Min in Truck Max in Truck F1 F2 F4 1 FS 1 1312 10 3 9J4 11 5 Jen Trim Default Enable Slump Table Default Admix Code 02 09 10 113 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 Batching Defaults Screen Page 2 Trial Mi 1 Min Max Moisture Entry Type S Default Mix Entry Type S Round Batch Size By FIELDS FIELD DESCRIPTION PAGE 1 BATCHING DEFAULTS SCREEN Plant Name Browseable field containing list of available plants Maximum Load Size Unit Default maximum load size that this plant is capable of batching The Unit is the unit of measure for the load size yd or m3 Next Load Number is run this number is incremented by one Maximum Number of Batches Maximum number of batches that this plant can run per load If this value is 1 multi batching is disabled Continuous Run Yes No field that sets whet
61. port destinations from the Port Parameters screen To modify a port destination select it and press F4 to pull it up on the Port Parameters screen Ticket Destination device for tickets Report Destination device for reports Logging Destination device for logs of each order Remote Destination device for batches controlled by a remote system Alt Ticket Destination device for alternate tickets The Spectrum can be configured to print two different pre printed tickets from one plant with the same ticket format 02 09 10 156 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 DESCRIPTION Scoreboard Destination port for information sent to a Scoreboard Note This port is configured on the Port Parameters screen Dispatch Status Enable Auto Truck to Yes No field that sets whether trucks automatically Loading advance from the ticketed to the loading status on the Dispatch screen Enable Auto Truck to Yes No field that sets whether trucks automatically Washdown advance from loading to the washdown status on the Dispatch screen Default User Code Default user for this plant Only orders for this plant will be displayed To display all orders for all plants leave this field blank Alternate Plant Name The Spectrum can be configured to print to two different pre printed tickets from one plant with the same ticket format The Alternate Plant Name and Alt Ticket
62. product code 02 09 10 57 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 Quantity Type DESCRIPTION Default quantity when the product is sold The options are B balance causes the product quantity to be set to zero when quantity ordered quantity delivered F flat rate causes the product quantity to be automatically set to 1 in the order M mix based causes the quantity of the resale product to match the quantity of the main mix design on the BATCH SETUP screen Taxable Indicates whether the product is taxable Auto Add e N Product is not automatically added to an order e A Product is automatically added to all orders e W Product is automatically added to all orders during the winter season e S Product is automatically added to all orders during the summer season Date ranges are set on the SYSTEM DEFAULTS screen of the SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MENU e O Product is added if ordered amount is less than the indicated threshold e L Product is added if the load size amount is less than the indicated threshold Threshold Works in conjunction with the Auto Add field when that field contains an O or L value Determines minimum order and minimum load size charges List Price Controls the automatic addition of this product to orders Per unit sale price for the product Inventory Enable To display inventory
63. resale items on the ticket Anything between RESALE and RESALE will be printed for each item on the resale product list Use this loop for descriptions pricing etc UNDER starts stops the underlining of text BOLD starts stops bold printing COMP starts stops compressed printing Compressed printing is equal to 17 CPI on an Okidata 320 WIDE starts stops wide printing Wide printing prints one character in the space two characters normally occupy IF starts stops a group of actions usually PRINT The starts the actions if the condition on that line is true The stops the actions IF cannot be used within a Resale Loop IF single conditional statement If the condition on the IF line is true the action listed on the next line takes place 133 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 DESCRIPTION ACTION JUMP instructs the printer to scroll to a designated line number This jump is absolute not relative This means that if you specify JUMP 6 the printer will jump to line 6 not 6 lines from the current position If the specified line has already been passed this action will have no effect RESET Use this at the top of the ticket This sets the printer to 10cpi 6 lpi and draft mode IBM emulation will not change to the draft mode PRINT_ALT converts the statement to the other measurement system US or Metric If the statement cannot be converted e g b
64. sent to the printer When you select an item having a greater than sign gt next to 1t and press ENTER a submenu appears For some reports all you have to do is select them from the submenu and press ENTER to print them For others when you select them from the submenu and press ENTER another screen appears so you can enter a date range and or other parameters e g order status You can then press F1 to print the report When you select an item with nothing next to it and press ENTER another screen appears so you can select a date range and or other parameters After you do this and press F1 the report is printed 238 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 CANCELING PRINTING OF ALL REPORTS If you decide to cancel the printing of all reports being generated select MAIN MENU REPORTS MENU CANCEL REPORT and press ENTER A message appears to inform you that all reports were cancelled and that information already sent to the printer may still print NOTE You cannot cancel the printing of individual reports DISPLAY BATCH WEIGHTS REPORT Note The sample report below does not contain all the items that can be printed For a more complete list see Common Items on Batch Weight Reports 1 Select Main Menu Reports Batch Weight Reports Display Batch Weights A selection screen appears with the cursor on the Load Date field and today s date already entered by default 2 To view batch we
65. should be loaded Display Graph On Yes No field that sets whether the Graph screen is automatically Run Button displayed when the F9 RUN button is pressed Sort Order Index Yes No field that sets whether the Order Index will have its By Order Code orders sorted by Order Code or by the projected time for the next load on the order Sequence Code Default sequence code to use when this user enters an order Batch on Receipt Yes No field that sets whether to batch tickets as soon as they are received from the dispatching computer Reset Loading on error Yes No field Y Resets the Discharge Authorize key lt F11 gt to Off whenever an error occurs during batching and Discharge Authorize is armed N The state of the Discharge Authorize key lt F11 gt will remain unchanged whenever an error occurs during batching Allow reordering of loads on Load Index Screen Yes No field that sets whether you can change the order of unbatched loads on the Load Index screen by pressing CTRL 1 to move a load up or CTRL Y to move a load down the list 02 09 10 166 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 FIELD DESCRIPTION Load Stack User Defined Field n n 1 or 2 Browseable field Sets which additional information is displayed on the Load Index Choices are 1 Job name 2 Job Address 3 Notes 4 Delivery Instructions 5 User Defined Field 6 Load ID 7 Return
66. the current date If it does not press SHIFT TAB until the cursor is on this field type the date or select it from the browse list and press ENTER The cursor moves to the Ticket ID field 3 Type or select the correct Ticket ID from the browse list Press ENTER Information for that Ticket ID appears on the screen and the cursor moves to the Truck field 4 Edit fields as needed pressing ENTER each time to move to the next field Some fields have no browse lists For these fields type the new information over the old as soon as you start typing the old information disappears To edit pricing discount and EN 206 information Consistence and Ext Desc fields press F5 to pull up the Discounts screen To edit Truck Code see Editing the Truck Code After Discharge To make a local ticket a dispatch ticket see Making a Local Ticket a Dispatch Ticket 5 When you are finished editing the ticket press F1 to save your changes 02 09 10 215 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 MAKING A LOCAL TICKET A DISPATCH TICKET You can turn a local ticket into a dispatch ticket if the dispatch link goes down When the link comes back up batch results for the edited ticket will then be available when the dispatch computer requests batch results To make a local ticket a dispatch ticket 1 Select the date and Ticket ID on the Edit Tickets screen 2 Press lt Shift F4 gt The cursor moves
67. the current year respectively e For each inventory period the number of units and loads batched are shown Also the number of units resold is displayed gt To VIEW USAGE FOR ALL Mix DESIGNS Select MAIN MENU REPORTS MIX DESIGN LISTING and press ENTER The Mix Design Listing is generated and sent to the printer or to a file if this was specified on the PLANTS screen 02 09 10 52 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 ADMIX DESIGNS Information about admix designs is stored in the Admix Designs database table Admix Designs are a convenient way to add seasonal ingredients such as calcium on an as needed basis to an order Admix Designs can be added edited and viewed on the ADMIX DESIGNS screen To access this screen select MAIN MENU gt DATA ENTRY ADMIX DESIGNS to view add and edit admix designs in your database The following screen appears Admix Designs Screen Admix Code Description Ref Quantity Type Taxable List Price Account Number Admix Alias LLLLLLLLII LLLLIIL LLL duddd LLL Y FIELDS DESCRIPTION Admix Code Code assigned to the admix design You may browse this field to see a list of admix designs in the database Description The complete name assigned to the admix design Ingredients Allows you to select an ingredient from a browseable list of ingredients Each ingredient is selected on a separate line Absolute Absolute value of the ingredient required t
68. the system makes calculations based on parameters and previously learned information for the feed type re FAST FEED Before Fast Feed starts a Safe Target is calculated by adding the requested Target to the Scale Start Tare then subtracting the Fast Feed Plant Erraticness and Preact values The Safe Target is less than the requested Target so that fast feeding does not overshoot the requested Target Note If no Preact Overide is set and a learned Preact is not available the Default Preact value is used Fast Feed begins if Fast Feed is enabled for the bin and the Safe Target is greater than the Minimum to Fast Feed value Initially Fast Feed conditionality opens multiple gates and continuously monitors the scale for the amount left to feed When the amount left to feed reaches the Extra Gate Shutoff value if enabled the second gate is closed The first gate is closed when the Safe Target value is reached Note When a feed s Safe Target is less than the Minimum to Fast Feed value Fast Feed is skipped and the system goes directly to Timed Feed re TIMED FEED Timed Feed is a timed opening of a single gate for a time duration based on the previous Flow Rates for the bin and material If Timed Feed is enabled and the amount left to feed is greater than the Minimum to Time Feed value the system calculates a time duration to open the gate As with Fast Feed a Safe Target is calculated based on the amount left to feed minus t
69. the system to assume a 1 ratio of Calcium for each 100 pounds of cement We already know that it takes 28 ounces of Calcium to achieve this ratio If however the mix design calls for 2 the system targets 56 ounces of Calcium for each 100 pounds of cement NOTE Calcium is part of the 4 ADX ingredient group Based on information for ingredients in this group is based on the 2 CEM group for target calculations 02 09 10 43 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 HUNDRED WEIGHT INGREDIENTS Hundred Weight ingredients have their mix design target amounts based on each 100 pounds of cement To make an ingredient a hundred weight ingredient enter c in the Based On field and 1 in the Based On Factor field This means an admix measured in ounces would have 1 ounce of the admix added for each 100 pounds of cement NGREDIENT EFFECTIVENESS In the Effectiveness field of the INGREDIENTS screen you can enter an effectiveness value to compensate for varying strengths Example Mix calls for 10 oz of Air e At 100 effectiveness 10 oz is used per yard e At 90 effectiveness 11 11 oz is used per yard 10 0z 90 11 11 oz 02 09 10 44 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 Mix DESIGNS Information about mix designs recipes for concrete mixes is stored in the Mix Designs database table Mix Designs can be added edited and viewed on the MIx DESIGNS screen To access this screen select MAIN MENU
70. to B To allow batch weights printing leave this field set to Y 1 Select MAIN MENU SYSTEM MAINTENANCE PRINTER SETUP A blank PRINTER SETUP screen appears with the cursor on the Node Number field 2 Press F2 to pull up a list of nodes Select the appropriate node and press ENTER The screen will then look something like the one shown next Printer Setup Screen Node Number Default Login User Code Record Batch Weights to Disk Print Top Half of Ticket Record Log Ticket Page Length Ticket Page Width Ticket Script Name s Set EPSON mode 143 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 FIELDS PRINTER SETUP SCREEN FIELD DESCRIPTION Node Number Spectrum batch computer being configured Default Login User User login to appear when this node is booted up Code Record Batch Y means save batch weights to hard disk N means do not Weights to Disk save batch weights to hard disk Print Top Half of Y means print delivery and product information N means Ticket do not print delivery and product information only print batch weights Record Log Y means enable the logging printer selected on MAIN MENU SYSTEM MAINTENANCE PLANTS Ticket Page Length Number of lines from top to bottom of ticket 66 is the default Ticket Page Width Number of characters that can be printed from left to right on the ticket 80 is the default 02 09 10 144 Spectrum User s Guide Ver
71. to pull up the Ticket Alias File Select the desired database field and press ENTER That field and its alias appear on the TICKET LAYOUT EDITOR screen Press the Down Arrow key to move to the next line Repeat Steps 4 5 and 6 above for all Delivery Information you want to be printed on the ticket Enter NL when you want the data to be printed on a new line of the ticket 139 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 Delivery Information on Ticket Script 2 timel2 money 20 PRINT 40 LLLLLLLLL LLL ee eee eee eee ee eee ee eee eee ee eee eee ee eee Product Information Using the screen example on the next page as a guide do the following 02 09 10 8 10 11 12 13 14 15 Enter a NL action immediately after the Delivery Information Arrow down to the next action line and enter RESALE and press ENTER Press ENTER to move to the Data field In the Data field for this first line of Product Information enter the trigger for the Resale Loop This is usually Product Load Size Press ENTER The cursor moves to the Action field for the next data field Enter PRINT for this action and press ENTER The cursor moves to the Column field Enter the column number where you want this data to be printed on the ticket Press ENTER The cursor moves to the Data field Enter the next data field to be printed for Product Information Press ENTER three times This bypasses the Instanc
72. to the Disp field 3 4 Press lt F1 gt to save your changes Enter a unique Dispatch Ticket Code REPRINTING TICKETS You can print a copy of an existing ticket This does not affect inventory or delivered amounts Tickets may be reprinted from either the BATCH SETUP or the EDIT TICKET screens Use the BATCH SETUP to reprint the last ticket Use the EDIT TICKET screen to reprint older tickets wm TO REPRINT THE LAST TICKET l Ze 3 Select MAIN MENU BATCH SETUP Press F1 The system prompts you to press F1 to reprint the last ticket or ESC to continue what you were doing Press F1 to reprint the last ticket w TO REPRINT AN OLDER TICKET 1 4 Select MAIN MENU DATA ENTRY EDIT TICKETS A blank Edit Ticket screen appears with the cursor on the Date field Type or select from the browse list the desired date Press ENTER The cursor moves to the Ticket ID field Type or select from the browse list the desired Ticket ID Press ENTER Ticket information for the selected ticket populates the screen Press F6 to reprint the ticket TICKET REPORTS Examples of ticket reports are provided in the Reports section of this guide 02 09 10 216 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 BATCH WEIGHTS Batch weight items can be included or excluded from the batch weight information saved to hard disk and printed on tickets and batch weight reports This is accomplished on the Batch
73. to the Mix Code field For Project related orders Browse the list of projects or type the Project Code Press ENTER to move to the Mix Code field Browse the list of mix designs Select the appropriate one and press ENTER The cursor moves to the Ordered field Type in the quantity ordered If a finish load will be needed type a next to the quantity Press ENTER The cursor moves to the Slump field Using the table of field descriptions given on the previous page as a reference make changes to the remaining fields as necessary If resale products are included add them in the Mix field Press F1 to save the order re TO EDIT AN ORDER There is more than one way to edit an order One way is from the ORDER ENTRY screen Another way is from the ORDER INDEX Obviously editing is limited on the ORDER INDEX because less information is displayed But this is a quick way to change data such as order time status or amount Changes such as travel and waiting times must be made from the ORDER ENTRY screen Editing from both of these screens is discussed next Editing from the Order Index You can change the following items directly from the ORDER INDEX To do this type over the existing information The message Update occurred appears at the bottom left of the screen 02 09 10 Order Time time first load is to arrive at job site Job Name Order Status 184 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 e Tru
74. to the PRINTER SETUP screen Sh F8 Reprint Reprints the last ticket F3 CopyLine Places the contents of the current line in a stack i e clipboard Not recommended F4 PutLine Places the contents of the stack 1 e clipboard into the current line Not recommended F5 InsLine Inserts a data line not a ticket line You must press ENTER after selecting this function F6 DelLine Deletes the current data line You must press ENTER after selecting this function F7 Clear Clears the current screen F8 Delete Deletes the current ticket script 136 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 THE TICKET ALIAS FILE The Ticket Alias File allows you to assign aliases to database fields so you do not have to memorize their formal names This is helpful when you are creating a ticket script The Ticket Alias File is displayed when you press Shift F5 from the TICKET LAYOUT EDITOR An example of the Ticket Alias File is shown next customer customer customer customer customer customer customer customer customer customer customer customer customer customer LLLLLLLLLLLL i FIELDS Ticket Alias File account_balance account_number account_status address_1 address_2 city contact_name credit_limit cus tomer_code cus tomer_name default_cod_flag default_tax_zone_code discount_code notes LLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLI U e Uer WEE Ya aet
75. warning message appears You can continue with the shutdown by pressing F1 but inventory and other data may be affected 02 09 10 20 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 NAVIGATING THE SYSTEM ACCESSING SCREENS Menus Spectrum screens are accessible through menus Available screens are listed as menu items see the sample screen below Activating a menu item is as easy as selecting the option on the menu and pressing ENTER To select a menu item press the N key to move down to the item or the tT key to move up Each time you press one of the arrow keys the cursor is moved up or down one line Main Menu Batch Setup Load Index Demand Batching Dispatch Data Entry Order Index Reports End of Day Plant Setup System Maintenance Quit Spectrum User Login Sales Order Number Version Sub Menus Some menus have sub menus A gt symbol is shown to the right of each sub menu as shown on the screen below A sub menu is accessed the same way as any menu item by highlighting it and pressing ENTER Function Keys Function keys F1 through F12 at the top of the keyboard are also used to access certain screens When function keys are used in this way labels are provided Labels for F1 through F8 are provided at the bottom of the screen labels for F9 through F12 at the top NOTE F9 through F12 are reserved for batching functions F9 RUN F10 HOLD F11 DISCH and F12 GRAPH 02 09 10
76. which the weight of the ingredient is multiplied to obtain the volume i e a conversion factor This factor is usually used for liquids Inventory Enable Yes No field that enables disables inventory checking of this ingredient in the On Hand column of the Inventory Period screens Normally this field is set to Y except for waters This field also enables disables inventory checking for mixes and resale products Cost Per Cost of the ingredient per Inventory unit of measure Decimal Points Number of decimal points that appear on the MIX DESIGN and BATCH SETUP screens for the ingredient amount Modify Flag A Y yes value permits you to modify the amount of the ingredient in the mix design on the BATCH SETUP screen An N no value prohibits this action Print Inventory Unit When this field is set to Y the inventory report will print in inventory units instead of internal units Tracepoints This field determines whether tracepoints are enabled and recorded in the Error file for debugging Options are Y enable Tracepoints N do not enable Tracepoints P for Performance enable Tracepoints and provide more details in the Error file Check Negative A Y yes value tells the system to report an error if the Correction material s target passes below zero after calculating the targets on the BATCH SETUP screen Minimum Allowed In Minimum amount of the ingredient allowed in a mix
77. 0 000 N N 02 09 10 129 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 CORRECTIONS BASED ON ICE This feature allows Spectrum to correct the batching targets of a material or group of materials based on the actual batching error s of another material or group of materials A typical use is the correction of water targets based on Ice weighing errors For corrections based on Ice the material calculation type K is used as shown in the following sample screen Note Calculations for Ice must be entered on the last line of the screen Recalculate Position Group 1 Group 2 Type Factor Targets Trace Comment 1 2 CEM 2 CEM X 0 000 N N 2 2 CEM 4 ADX B 0 000 N N 3 4 ADX 4 ADX E 0 000 N N 4 2 CEM F 0 000 N N 5 2 CEM R 1 000 N N 6 ALL T 0 000 N N 7 ALL A 0 000 N N 8 3 WAT 3 WAT X 0 000 N N 9 4 ADX 3 WAT C 1 000 N N 10 5 WATADX 3 WAT S 1 000 N N 11 5 WATADX 1 AGG S 0 000 N N 12 1 AGG 3 WAT M 0 000 Y N 13 3 SLURRY Y 0 000 N N 14 3 SLURRY 1 FINES U 1 000 N N 15 ALL L 0 000 N N 16 ICE ICE ADJ K 1 000 N N Must be the last line e Type K corrections are made to load targets When a material is multi batched corrections will be applied proportionately across the load e Ingredients in Group 1 must have a Batch Calculation Type of n entered on the Ingredients screen This type disables Group 1 s batch to batch material correctio
78. 02 09 10 50 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 To CHANGE AN I NGREDIENT IN ALL MIXES 1 Make sure the ingredient has been added to the database see Ingredients in this manual From the MIX DESIGNS screen press SHIFT F6 to pull up the following change box The cursor is in the From field Global Material Change Box Press F2 to browse for the ingredient to be changed Highlight the ingredient and press ENTER to enter it in this field The cursor moves to the To field Press F2 to browse for the ingredient to change to Highlight the ingredient and press ENTER to enter it in this field Press F1 to initiate the global change process All occurrences of the From ingredient are replaced with the To ingredient To VIEW USAGE FOR A SINGLE Mix DESIGN NOTE The Inventory field on the Mix Designs screen must be set to Y if you 02 09 10 want to track inventory for the mix Access the MIX DESIGNS screen In the Mix Code field type the code for the mix design whose usage data you wish to view Press SHIFT F5 to pull up inventory data for this particular mix design An example is shown next Batched Loads Resold 1 35 00 7 0 00 2 175 00 35 0 00 3 700 00 140 0 00 4 700 00 140 0 00 51 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 e The numbers 1 2 3 and 4 represent inventory periods for the current day the current week the current month and
79. 1 Save MATERIAL CALCULATIONS SCREEN Saves data you have entered or changed F2 Browse Pulls up a list of possible entries Browseable fields have these brackets F5 Insert Inserts a new row above the row currently selected F7 Clear Clears all information from the screen Caution This operation erases all material calculation information from the system Be sure this is what you want to do before you save this change FS Delete Deletes the row currently selected Caution Be sure this is what you want to do before you save this change 02 09 10 125 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 MATERIAL CALCULATION TYPES The calculation type determines which calculation will be performed on materials specified for the group s listed in a particular row on the MATERIAL CALCULATIONS screen The calculation type is selected in the Type column Each calculation type is described below Name Adjustment Based On Correction Effectiveness Substitution General Load Size No Ret 1Load Size No Re Error Correct Load Size All Moisture 02 09 10 Description of Calculation First Group First Group Adjustment Factor Amount Used when the In Truck amount on the Batch Setup form is subtracted from the calculated water amount for the load Second Group First Group x Based On Factor Bases the amount of one Group on the amount of anot
80. 10 2 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 CONTENTS NS RN NEP OCU CUI OMS ad LO AUDIENCE in 10 REGULATORY COMPLIANCE iicc s5s aseessscusssossovseslistyessacsepiosdessessssessnesssdsnastsasveneveissteabapssapscdassoustoassessecdsess 10 Mn DOT Certification s cececccececssssscsescscscsesesesesesenenensnsscscnssssssseseseseaseeueeeeeeceeseseseaeseneneenensnseaeas 10 California Type Evaluation Program CTEP Approval o sccccsssssssssssssesestsesceesesesesessentnesensnseaeas 10 REVISION Saipan rr EE E EE E EEE EE EREE 11 User s Guide Terminology e ssesesocesooesssesssccssocesooesoocesoecssocesocssocessosessesssocesocssoossssessssee LO Menu Screen and Database NAMES c cccccccsccssecsssseescesscesecusecssccussessessceseesseeesceesceescesscusecusecese 13 Os Menu and Screen Locations A a E bate CR 13 S Field NAMES or de ado AN AN A 13 Keystroke Designations cocoa 13 Features amp FUNCIIONS ccccccccscssssesesscssscsssssecscsessssesesessssessssssesesessessssssesesessessssesesesecsesecseseeeecseneees 13 amp References to Other Sections of This Guide c c ccccesesesesssessseseseesesseseseseseeeeeeeseseseseaeneneeeensnseaeas 13 Spectrum System Terminology oooocmsssssssssss 14 Database e la ld nO 14 EKRKKKE E x a A NeW SAA Ta Power up and Shutdown Procedures cssssccssssccssssccssssccssccsssscssssssssesssssesssssssees 19 POWER UP PROCEDURE ts A N A a SS GEESE ATS RR ER
81. 2 Close Sec Sec Sec Sec Open Adjust Pulse Close Adjust Pulse Hold Empty Scale Open Scale Settle Time Max Gate Close Time Gate Close Forced Start Delay Delete Page 2 tes Sec ld Type N le 0 00 Sec 0 000 Sec 0 000 Sec Open2 Adjust Pulse Close2 Adjust Pulse Delete Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 FIELDS FIELD DESCRIPTION PAGE 1 SCALES SCREEN Code Browseable list of scales Name Description of the scale Grad Unit Read only field that displays the scale graduation size e g 20 00 and scale units e g 1b Capacity Read only field that displays the maximum amount of weight that the scale can hold Allow Early Feed Yes No field enables disables freewheeling for this scale Keyboard Hold Browseable field containing a list of function keys The one selected can be used on the Graph screen to hold this device from discharging Display Group Browseable field containing a list of group color numbers in which to display this device on the Graph screen These color numbers correspond to the colors selected for the Graph screen on the Batching Defaults screen Display Order Order in which this scale is to be displayed with other scales on the Graph screen Flow Control Enabled Yes No field that allows disallows the system to open and close the gate to maintain a constant flow rate If this field is set to N the system o
82. 21 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 MOVING WITHIN SCREENS SELECTING A FIELD To enter data into a specific field that field must be selected When a field is selected it is highlighted in a distinct color usually light blue this cannot be shown in the example below Customer Code is the selected field below When a new screen is accessed the top leftmost field is typically selected by default Field selected Customer Code EA AA Customer Name Account Number Account Status Credit Limit User Defined Account Balance Tax Zone Returned Concrete Allowed C 0 D Print Prices Address Address P 0 Box 1ty State County Zip Postal Code Contact Name Phone Number Notes MOVING FROM FIELD TO FIELD As mentioned above the cursor is normally on the top leftmost field when you access a screen To move forward one field at a time press one of the following keys TAB ENTER or Y To move backward one field at a time press either SHIFT TAB or the 1 key 02 09 10 22 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 SELECTING ENTRIES FROM BROWSEABLE FIELDS Browseable fields have square brackets around the entry area as shown in the previous example By pressing F2 from the browseable Customer field below you can pull up a list of valid customer entries You can then use the up and down atrow keys to highlight the desired entry and press ENTER to pull the entry into the Customer field
83. 24 First refers to the standard floppy disk drive on your workstation Second is valid if you have two floppy drives USB can only be used if a USB removable device has been set up and connected to the PC 4 Press F1 to start the backup process Follow the on screen instructions Another message tells you when backup is complete To RESTORE BATCH WEIGHTS Batch weights stored on USB removable device can be viewed directly from the USB removable device If the USB removable device is not connected the system reads what is on the hard disk Batch weights stored on floppy disk however must be restored to the hard disk before they can be viewed To restore batch weights to hard disk 1 02 09 10 Select MAIN MENU SYSTEM MAINTENANCE DISK UTILITIES BATCH WEIGHTS BACKUP amp RESTORE The Operation field will be selected and Backup is the default operation Select Restore from the browse list and press ENTER Press ENTER again to move the cursor to the Drive field Select the desired restore media in the Drive field and press ENTER First is the default First refers to the standard floppy disk drive on your workstation Second is valid if you have two floppy drives USB can only be used if a USB removable device has been set up and connected to the PC Press F1 to start the restore process Follow the on screen instructions A message tells you when restore is complete 287 Spectrum User s Gui
84. 24 METERED LIQUIDS After you have set up bins and scales you should set up metered liquids e g admixes and metered water In the next section you will be setting up bottles then assigning feed destinations to each bin silo and bottle For now let s focus on the METERED LIQUIDS screen shown next and a description of the fields on this screen As with many Spectrum screens you can go directly to other related screens from this one For instance you can press F4 to go to the I O Assignments screen or F5 to go to the Material Assignments screen Metered Liquids Screen Code Material Monitor Enabled Graduation Unit 1 00 Maximum Capacity 9999 00 Keyboard Hold 4 Allow Early Feed Display Group Hold Feed Skip Zero Check Flow Start Delay Seconds Valve A I Switch to Alternate Tank After Seconds Valve B If Flow Rate Below Sec Preact Amount Preact Override Amount Plant Erraticness Valve B Shutoff Coast Settle Time Seconds Start Delay Seconds FIELDS FIELD DESCRIPTION Code Browseable list of metered liquids Material Description of the metered liquid Monitor Enabled Yes No field that allows disallows manual feeding of this material to be tracked and recorded Graduation Unit Read only field Amount of this liquid dispensed in metered units per meter graduation This value comes from the Scale and Meter I O Setup screen where E Z Cal Manual Station configur
85. 5 HOT 00 0 00 00 0 00 100 XR A 0 00 00 0 00 220 N 5868 00 93 22532 00 DARACCEL 0 00 00 0 00 DARACEM 55 A 0 00 00 5000 00 B VR 1667 50 07 28332 50 ICRO AIR 2201 00 oz 36 7799 00 POZZ 309 00 oz 139 19691 00 POZZUTEC o 0 00 oz 00 10000 00 RHEOBUILD 0 00 oz 00 22000 00 END OF REPORT N 01 050 0 09 Or Oe 0 107 One 107 GO nO 302 20 00000bkQqrprpbprrpp HEP EPP EP HE EE ps N N N N tO GOGO UN Oo O O 0 0 NO 6 02 09 10 244 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 MATERIAL USAGE BY PLANT Select Time Period 1 for Day 2 for Week 3 for Month or 4 for Year Example below shows Today s Totals Friday November 1 2002 14 40 USAGE BY PLANT TODAY S TOTALS PLANT 01 Last Cleared Time Date 06 26 2002 11 31 NGREDIENT LOCATION ON HAND REQUIRED AUTO BATCHED ERROR MANUAL TOTAL BATCHED MATERIAL USAGE COST 1 CR GR BINO2 9505019 00 lb 151525 84 lb 151044 81 lb See 0 00 lb 151044 81 lb T5921 1 CR STC BINO1 3342546 50 1b 113710 73 lb 113453 53 lb A 0 00 lb 113453 53 lb 678 40 2 CR GR BINO6 589758 56 lb 165938 86 lb 165177 44 1b 46 0 00 lb 165177 44 lb 789 73 BLEND C BINO4 4265180 50 lb 298628 78 lb 297123 34 lb 200 0 00 1b 297123 34 lb 1240 11 GRAV BLEND BINO5 4882801 00 lb 439199 34 lb 437356 22 lb 42 0 00 lb 437356 22 lb 2015 01 SAND TCG BINO3 6545946 50 lb 1002252 94 lb 998015 50 lb 42 0 00 1b 998015 50 lb 2105 67 CEMENT SILOO1 6
86. 55 POZZ CEMENT COLD 2 CR GR TYPE 3 PORT WOOD 02 09 10 BI BI BI BI BI AD AD AD AD AD AD AD AD AD sI DEVICE 04 05 02 01 03 IXO9 IX08 IXO2 IXO7 IXO6 IXO5 IXO4 IXO1 IXO3 LOO1 WATERO1 BI SI SI 06 LOO3 LOO2 UNITS REQUIRED lb lb lb lb lb Oz Or oz oz oz oz Oz Ox Oz 0 307 8100 103567 165938 0 313421 oz lb gl lb KKK END 298628 439199 L5SLSZS 3 LUST TO 1002252 Oz 0 oOo BRODWDDOABKRONDO WON OW o MANUAL 246 BATCHED hos 00000000000 0000000o00o0 x000000000000000000 0o0 ZITLAZ 437356 151044 113453 998015 O O 0 0 309 8081 100652 LOLITA O 311711 NOBABOOTOOUNUDFP COCO Un AN ww ON HAND 4265180 5 4882801 0 9505019 0 3342546 5 6545946 5 22000 0 10000 0 22487 0 0 0 7776 0 283325 0 0 5000 0 19691 0 6585320 5 733899 4 589758 6 0 0 288288 8 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 Mix INVENTORY Select Time Period 1 for Day 2 for Week 3 for Month or 4 for Year Example below shows Today s Totals Tuesday April 18 2000 MIX INVENTORY REPORT TODAY S TOTALS PLANT 01 BATCH UNITS ACTIVITY TODAY FARR KK TOTAL ACTIVITY RETURNED BATCHED LOADS RETURNED BATCHED ACTIVITY TODAY ARRA RX TOTAL ACTIVITY RETURNED BATCHED LOADS RETURNED BATCHED GLOBAL TOTAL yd 02 09 10 247 kK KKK kk KK KK LOADS Spectrum User s Guid
87. 585320 50 lb 8100 00 lb 8081 39 lb 23 0 00 lb 8081 39 lb 898 10 PORT WOOD SILO02 288288 81 lb 313421 94 lb 311711 19 lb eo 0 00 lb 311711 19 lb 1540 86 TYPE 3 SILOO3 0 00 lb 0 00 1b 0 00 lb 0 00 0 00 lb 0 00 1b 0 00 COLD WATERO1 733899 38 gl 103567 39 gl 100652 62 gl 2 81 0 00 gl 100652 62 gl 0 00 100 XR ADMIX04 0 00 oz 0 00 oz 0 00 oz 0 00 0 00 oz 0 00 oz 0 00 220 N ADMIX02 22487 00 oz 5856 19 oz 5913 00 oz 0 97 0 00 oz 5913 00 oz 298 56 DARACCEL ADMIX07 0 00 oz 0 00 oz 0 00 oz 0 00 0 00 oz 0 00 oz 0 00 DARACEM 55 ADMIX01 5000 00 oz 0 00 oz 0 00 oz 0 00 0 00 oz 0 00 oz 0 00 MB VR ADMIX05 28332 50 oz 16336107 1667 50 oz 2 07 0 00 oz 1667 50 oz 185 49 MICRO AIR ADMIX06 7776 00 oz 2135 37 oz 2224 00 oz 4 15 0 00 oz 2224 00 oz 145 32 POZZ ADMIXO3 19691 00 oz 307 80 oz 309 00 oz 0 39 0 00 oz 309 00 oz 67 35 POZZUTEC ADMIX08 10000 00 oz 0 00 oz 0 00 oz 0 00 0 00 oz 0 00 oz 0 00 RHEOBUILD ADMIX09 22000 00 oz 0 00 oz 0 00 oz 0 00 0 00 oz 0 00 oz 0 00 END OF REPORT 02 09 10 245 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 MATERIAL USAGE BY BIN Select Time Period 1 for Day 2 for Week 3 for Month or 4 for Year Example below shows Today s Totals Friday November 1 2002 KK 14 51 USAGE BY BIN REPORT TODAY S TOTALS PLANT Last Cleared Time Date 06 26 2002 11 27 01 KK CODE BLEND C GRAV BLEND 1 CR GR 1 CR ST SAND TCG RHEOBUILD POZZUTEC 220 N DARACCEI MICRO Al MB VR 100 XR DARACEM
88. 8 for other unprinted tickets 205 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 gt ADJUSTING TRUCK CHARGE RATE The truck charge rate is automatically entered in the field of the BATCH SETUP screen when a truck is assigned to the load This rate shows the percentage of the plant s discharge rate that the truck can handle The system controls discharge into the truck as follows Each scale discharges at a rate that is the median point of the Maximum and Minimum flow rates for that scale For example if the Aggregate scale s maximum flow rate is 300 lb sec and its minimum flow rate is 100 lb sec the scale s actual discharge rate would be 200 lb sec A 100 truck charge rate on the BATCH SETUP screen means the Aggregate scale would load the truck at the 200 lb sec discharge rate A 50 truck charge rate means the Aggregate scale would load the truck at 100 Ib sec half of the scale s discharge rate To Adjust the Truck Charge Rate 1 On the BATCH SETUP screen press TAB until the field is highlighted This field is just to the right of the Truck field 2 Type the desired discharge rate percentage and press ENTER 3 Proceed with the batching process Note Changes to the truck charge rate on the BATCH SETUP screen do not change the charge rate for the truck in the TRUCKS database table 02 09 10 206 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 THE GRAPH SCREEN The GRAPH screen shows the progress of weigh up and
89. 898 8898 VAR 31 32 42 1 1 07 3 94 0 90 SABSP WATER WATER IN TRUCK load TRIM WATER TARES CEM SCALE B LOAD NO 8908 TICKET ID 336 SMOISTURE PLANT NAME 01 TIME 13 41 SEQ wW DATE 09 25 2000 LOAD ID 427 ACTUAL WAT 96 16 gl 5 20 gl 5 00 0 25 M M 176 44 gl 280 0 gl 0 0 gl When oven dry mixes are used the 7 MOISTURE and ACTUAL WAT column labels will read FREE WAT and FREE WATER respectively 02 09 10 240 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 BATCH WEIGHTS REPORT BY DATE Note The sample report below does not contain all the items that can be printed 1 For a more complete list see Common Items on Batch Weight Reports Select Main Menu Reports Batch Weight Reports Batch Weights by Date A selection screen appears with the cursor on the Start Date field By default today s date is already entered in this field as well as in the End Date field To view batch weights for dates other than today enter the appropriate date in MMDDYYYY format the system supplies the slashes and press ENTER Or press F2 to pull up a list of dates highlight the appropriate date and press ENTER Tab down to the End Date field Repeat the process given in Step 2 Press F1 to send the report to the printer An example is shown below Note that only the results for one batch are shown the report would normally consist of m
90. 9 10 242 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 NCOMING NVENTORY REPORT Tuesday April 18 2000 AD INCOMING INVENTORY REPORT for Tuesday April 18 2000 thru Tuesday April 18 2000 Incoming Inventory for Material DARACCEL Time Plant Bin Tank Amount Units Supplier 5000 00 oz 5000 00 oz Incoming Inventory for Material TYPE 3 Time Plant Bin Tank Amount Supplier 01 SILOO3 100000 Subtotal Supplier ED S CEMEN 100000 REPORT 02 09 10 243 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 MATERIAL USAGE By MATERIAL Select Time Period 1 for Day 2 for Week 3 for Month or 4 for Year Example below shows Today s Totals Friday November 1 2002 14 37 KER USAGE BY MATERIAL REPORT TODAY S TOTALS Run from plant 01 Last Cleared Time Date 06 26 2002 11 27 INGREDIENT REQUIRED AUTO BATCHED ERROR 5 ON HAND 1A S 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 1 CR GR 151525 88 151044 81 32 9505017 00 1 CR STC 113710 73 113453753 eas 3342546 50 1 RD GR 0 00 0 00 00 0 00 2 CR GR 165938 86 165177 44 46 589758 56 BLEND C 298628 78 297123 34 50 4265181 50 GRAV BLEND 431620 38 429798 09 42 4890358 00 SAND TCG 1002252 94 998015 50 42 6545947 50 CEMENT 8100 00 8081 39 423 6585320 50 FINE AGG L 0 00 0 00 00 2386523 00 FLYASH 0 00 0 00 00 0 00 PORT ST M 0 00 0 00 00 0 00 PORT WOOD 311306 94 309609 78 SS 29039031 PORTWOOD L 0 00 0 00 00 0 00 TYPE 3 0 00 0 00 00 0 00 COLD 103567 38 100652 62 8L 7338992
91. AMES When a field is discussed its name appears in the following style Order field Y KEYSTROKE DESIGNATIONS Keyboard letter keys are displayed in bold font inside square brackets as follows F2 ENTER TAB Keystroke combinations pressing two or more keys at the same time are shown with a plus sign between the key s names Example ALT C FEATURES amp FUNCTIONS Where possible features and system functions appear in the following formats Batch on Receipt feature Update Inventory function REFERENCES TO OTHER SECTIONS OF THIS GUIDE Sections of this Guide are cross referenced as follows See Batching Operations for more information 02 09 10 13 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 SPECTRUM SYSTEM TERMINOLOGY The following terminology is used throughout this Guide when referring to different parts of the Spectrum System Y DATABASE A database is a group of electronically stored information that can be retrieved and used so that it does not have to be re typed every time it is needed The Spectrum System contains a single database for your company Most of the information stored in the Spectrum database is accessible through DATA ENTRY screens DATABASE TABLE The Spectrum System database consists of many tables Each table contains separate like information e g information on customers is stored in its own CUSTOMER database table Y RECORD A record is a collection of information ab
92. BATCH SETUP screen when this mix design is batched If Slump Tables are enabled this value is ignored see Slump Tables for more information 02 09 10 46 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 Slump Min DESCRIPTION The minimum threshold before the water cement ratio for the mix is compromised When batching this mix if you enter a slump less than this value an error occurs and you will be forced to enter a new slump value Slump Max The maximum threshold before the water cement ratio for this mix is compromised When batching this mix if you enter a slump more than this amount an error occurs and you will be forced to enter a new slump value Air Content Amount of free air trapped in the concrete due to the gradation of aggregates This value is typically supplied by the QC department and is only used for yield calculations Mixer Time Minimum amount of time needed for a properly blended mix This time determines at what point the load is ready to dump from the mixer For mixer systems only Modify Allows you to indicate whether the operator is allowed to modify the mix design on the BATCH SETUP screen at batch time If set to N values cannot be changed before batching Mix Type Either S for SSD weights D for standard Oven Dry weights or O for Minnesota DOT Oven Dry weights At batch time the system converts Oven Dry weights back to SSD weights Mix Class Inve
93. Batched Y Liquid Ingredients Dry Ingredients All Ingredients Based On Factor 0 000 Substitution 0 00 Correction Weighting 0 00 Effectiveness 100 00 Slump Factor 0 000 Correction Factor 0 000 Absorption 0 00 Specific Gravity 0 00 Plant 01 Over Tolerance Under Tolerance Finished Batch Calculation Type nl 2 00 00 1 00 Tolerance Calculation Type n 10 00 Ib 10 00 lb 10 00 lb Sequence Priority 0 Sh F3 Unlearn Save Browse Page 2 HatCalc Delete Ingredients Screen Page 2 INGREDIENTS Purchase Inventory Unit Factor 0 00000 Inventory Internal Unit Factor 0 00000 Note that each unit factor is expressed as a weight per volume Specific Gravity of Slurry Solids 0 00 Small Batch Tolerances 0 00 Over Tolerance Under Tolerance 0 00 00 0 00 lb 0 00 lb Sh F3 Unlearn Save Browse Page 1 HatCalc Delete 02 09 10 35 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 FIELDS FIELD Code DESCRIPTION Code assigned to the ingredient You may browse this field to see a list of ingredients in the database Description Description of the ingredient e g 3 8 Rock Entry The units used on the MIX DESIGNS screen for this ingredient Based On Used only if the amount of this ingredient in a mix is based on the amount of another ingredient Usually used for admix ingredients Works with the Based On Factor field of this screen Valid entries are c The amount of the ingred
94. CORD Records are added edited and viewed the same way for all database tables therefore this information will only be presented once 1 Access the appropriate table through the DATA ENTRY menu 2 In the Code field type the code you are assigning to the record 3 Fill in the remaining fields as appropriate 4 Press F1 to save the new record Remember When you save a data entry screen you are saving a record To EDIT A DATABASE TABLE RECORD 1 Access the table that contains the record you wish to edit 2 In the Code field type or select from the browse list the code of the record you wish to edit 3 Press ENTER to bring that record to the screen 4 Tab to the field you want to change Type over or delete the existing data Do this for each field whose data you want to change 5 Press F1 to save the changes TIPS e Tocancel the changes you just made press F7 before you exit the screen e To delete the record altogether press F8 02 09 10 30 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 To VIEW A DATABASE TABLE RECORD 1 Access the table that contains the record you wish to edit 2 In the Code field type or select the code of the record you wish to edit 3 Press ENTER to bring that record to the screen To DELETE A DATABASE TABLE RECORD 1 Access the table that contains the record you wish to delete 2 In the Code field type or select the code of the record you wish to delete 3 Press
95. DATA ENTRY MIX DESIGNS to view add and edit mix designs in your database The following screen appears Mix Designs Screen Mix Code Description Maximum Load Unit Sequence Code Slump Default Min Hax Air Content Mixer Time Modify Mix Deel Mix Class Inventory Taxable List Price Account Number Alias Slump Table Consistence Ext Description 02 17 2004 ALKON 11 63 Sh F5 Inventory FIELDS _ DESCRIPTION Mix Code Code assigned to this mix design You may browse this field to see a list of mix designs in the database Description The complete name assigned to the mix design Ingredients Allows you to select an ingredient from a browseable list of ingredients Each ingredient is selected on a separate line 02 09 10 45 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 Absolute DESCRIPTION Absolute value of this ingredient required to make one unit cubic yard or cubic meter of the mix design Note An entry is required in either this field or the Based On field Based On Amount of this ingredient required to make one unit based on the amount of another ingredient The ingredient must have based on information entered on the INGREDIENTS screen Actual targets are figured at batch time based on the setups in the MATERIAL CALCULATIONS screen Note An entry is required in either this field or the Absolute field Yield This ingredient s portion of the mix
96. EVICE While most backups are completed in the End of processes backups done from the DISK UTILITIES menu offer additional flexibility in that you can designate which database files to backup Procedures for backing up to floppy disk and USB removable device are given next w TO BACK UP TO FLOPPY DISK 1 Select MAIN MENU SYSTEM MAINTENANCE DISK UTILITIES FLOPPY REMOVABLE MEDIA BACKUP amp RESTORE 02 09 10 280 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 2 The cursor is on the Operation field with Backup as the default entry Press ENTER to accept Backup and move the cursor to the Drive field CAUTION You should only use the Restore operation when directed to do so by Command Alkon Support Services personnel 3 The default value for the Drive field is First Press ENTER to select this entry The cursor moves to the Directory field First refers to the standard floppy disk drive on your workstation Second is valid if you have two floppy drives USB can only be used if a USB removable device has been set up and connected to the PC 4 The default for the Directory field is Database Press ENTER to accept this value The cursor moves to the Files field 5 Select one of the following options and press ENTER e All e Data Files e Customers Mixes Ingredients Orders e Projects e Trucks 6 Press F1 to start the backup process Follow the on screen instructions Another message tells you
97. Empty value its gate is held open for a set amount of time then closed Remaining water is then fed When all devices are empty an end of load signal is generated To avoid overflowing a truck you can assign a percentage of the discharge rate to the truck on the TRUCKS screen The discharge rate is then automatically reduced to what the truck can handle 02 09 10 173 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 BASIC STEPS FOR AUTOMATIC BATCHING To simplify our discussion of automatic batching we start with the basic steps for running a batch These are general guidelines only provided solely as an overview to understanding Spectrum batching they do not include details Details are given when we discuss the screens used to enter orders and prepare and run batches Without further adieu then here are the basic steps for running a batch automatically 1 02 09 10 From the ORDER INDEX or LOAD INDEX screen select the order you want to batch Remember the Order Index is used for orders entered locally on the Spectrum while the Load Index screen is used for orders downloaded from a Dispatch System Press F1 to pull the order onto the BATCH SETUP screen Make any necessary adjustments to the order this information is covered in the section titled Batch Setup Screen Press F9 RUN to start the batch The RUN prompt at the top of the screen turns white to show that the batch has been started The GRAPH screen ap
98. Guide Ver 6 24 ITEM ABSP DESCRIPTION Percentage of moisture above Oven Dry needed to achieve SSD Saturated Surface Dry weight This value comes from the Absorption field of the Ingredients screen and typically ranges from to 3 above Oven Dry Note This column appears if either of the variance columns or amount is turned off and Print Material Moisture Percent is turned on TOTMOIST Total moisture absorbed plus free moisture in the aggregate material of the mix design ABS WAT TOT WAT Absorbed moisture in the aggregate material as set by the supplier Total water in the batch Sum of free water and absorbed water FREE WAT Or MOISTURE Percentage of moisture detected by the probe or manually entered FREE WAT is printed for Oven Dry mixes MOISTURE is printed for SSD mixes This value can be followed by one of the following M means the moisture value was manually entered on the Moisture edit dialog accessed from the Batch Setup screen A means the moisture value was obtained from the automatic probe E means the system had problems obtaining the correct moisture value from the automatic probe FREE WATER or ACTUAL WAT ABS Weight of free water in the aggregate ingredient for Oven Dry mixes Volume of free water in the aggregate ingredient for SSD mixes FREE WATER is printed for Oven Dry mixes ACTUAL WAT is printed for SSD mixes
99. HATTO R UN iia il ici 272 RUNNING END OF PROCESSES csssessscececeesesssaececececsesseaececececsensaaececececseneaaeaececeeseseaueceeeeecsessaaeeeeecs 274 re Function Keys The End of Day Procedure Screen cceccesceseeseeseceseeeeceseeseeceeaeeeeeaeceeeaeeeeeeneens 275 EXPORTING BATCH WEIGHTS TO QC HELPER sccccccecsssssseceeececsessnececececsensaesesececeesesaaeceeceeesessaaeeeeecs 276 a ATO EXPOTEBGICH WELBNIS iranan oe ea ra vias oes OT Be aon RO OR ie 276 PROPER SHUTDOWN WHEN EOD IS NOT RUN o oo cece ceccccessscccececsesssececececeensnseseceeeceesesaaeeeeeeeceessaeeeeess 278 Disk Utilities idad FLOPPY REMOVABLE MEDIA BACKUP amp RESTORE sssessssesececeeseuececececeesenecececececsesssaeceeeeeesessaeaeeess 280 Backups To Floppy Disk or USB Removable Device ooo 280 e To Back Up to Floppy Diskettes 280 re To Back Up to USB Removable Device 000 eceeceeceseesseseeeseesecseeesececeesecseceseeaeeaecseceeeaeceseeaeceeeeaeenes 281 Restores from Floppy Disk or USB Removable Device 282 re To Restore from Floppy Disk cceceseeeeeseeeeeneeee 282 re To Restore from USB Removable DeviCe ooooccconcccnoncccnonoccononaconananononnncconnaconananonnnnnconananoconnnccnnnanc ns 282 HARD DISK BACKUP amp RESTORE ainn NEEE EEE E ATER AEE E AE E EE EEF AEE 283 To Back Up to Hard Disk cccccccccssscssscscscsescsesesesesesensncncscnsnsssssseseseseseseseacaesenceseseseseaeaeaeeeeeeeeees 283 S To Res
100. IGN W C Water cement ratio of the amounts specified in the mix design Equals TOTAL WATER WGT TOTAL CEMENT WGT WATER CEMENT DESIGN WATER Water cement ratio of the amounts actually batched Equals TOTAL WATER WGT TOTAL CEMENT WGT This ratio can be followed by one of the following codes T means you can add water up to the TO ADD amount without changing the stated water cement ratio A means you cannot add water This code appears if the TO ADD value is zero Amount of water needed to batch this load Equals DESIGN QTY LOAD SIZE ACTUAL WATER Amount of water actually used to batch this load minus the TO ADD amount 02 09 10 219 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 ITEM _ DESCRIPTION TO ADD Amount of water that can be added in the mixer SLUMP Slump maintained for this batch If slump tables are not used this value defaults to the mix s design slump WATER IN TRUCK Amount of water already in the truck ADJUST WATER Amount of water added or subtracted from this batch besides the trim amount TRIM WATER Amount of water to be added as trim This value is set in the Trim field of the Batch Setup screen LOAD COMPLETED Time the batch was completely discharged into the truck or LOAD TIME mixer TARES Start Tare ST and End Tare ET for each scale used to batch this load 02 09 10 220 Spectrum User
101. LL other users to stop their activity first If Node 1 is restarted in the middle of the day all other nodes must also be rebooted The preferred method for rebooting a node is to use the keyboard To reboot a node from the keyboard press and hold CTRL SHIFT ALT then press the DEL key on the numeric keypad Next release all the keys The screen counts down from 10 to 0 then the node reboots If after several attempts the keyboard reset method does not reboot the node press then release the RESET button on the front panel of the node if the node has such a button If neither of the above methods works switch the node s power off then back on using the node s main power switch This places stress on the node s circuits and should be used only as a last resort BOOTING INTO DOS Besides the QNX 4 2 partition DOS and Windows programs can also reside on Node hard drives or partitions If the DOS hard disk partition has not been deleted nodes other than Node 1 may be shut down at any time restarted with DOS used with DOS or Windows programs then restarted with the Spectrum without affecting the operation of the other nodes To start the node with DOS 1 Reboot the node by pressing CTRL SHIFT ALT then pressing the DEL key 2 Release all of the keys 3 When the node screen displays Boot Partition X where X is the number of the hard disk partition that is booting up press the number of the partit
102. Load Index Quick tickets are normally generated for non concrete products NOTE Changes to the following field requires a reboot Batchbook Format Used with Mix Design Polynomials PAGE 2 SYSTEM DEFAULTS SCREEN DEFAULT TRUCK TRIP TIMES These default times appear on the Order Times window of the Order Entry screen by pressing F3 You can change these times on this window Traveling Time Default length of time for a truck to drive from a plant to a job site Waiting Time Default length of time that a truck must wait at the job site before unloading Unloading Time Default length of time needed for a truck to completely unload all of its concrete at the job site Unloading Time Per Unit Default length of time needed for a truck to unload a cubic yard or cubic meter of concrete Washing Out Time Default length of time needed to wash out a truck after it has completed unloading its concrete 02 09 10 121 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 Returning Time DESCRIPTION Default length of time needed for a truck to travel from the job site back to the plant DISPATCH AUTOMATIC STATUS CONFIGURATION NOTE Used Only with the Mini Dispatch Feature Unloading Status Allow Auto Truck Yes No field that sets whether trucks can automatically Status advance through the phases of a delivery on the Mini Dispatch screen
103. Minutes 10 Minutes 1 Minutes 10 Minutes 20 Minutes Dispatch Automatic Status Configuration Allow Auto Truck Status Enable Auto Travel Status Enable Auto On Job Status Enable Auto Unloading Status Enable Auto Wash Out Status Enable Auto Return Status EA AAA SA Clear 02 09 10 119 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 FIELDS DESCRIPTION PAGE 1 SYSTEM DEFAULTS SCREEN USER DEFINED FIELDS Field labels for user defined fields that appear on the Order Entry Projects and Edit Tickets screens These labels can be up to 5 characters long AUTO ADD DATES Summer You can apply special charges to batches run on or after this date but before the Winter date MM DD format You can also automatically add extra products to the order based on the Summer and Winter dates They will be pulled into the order automatically Winter You can apply special charges to batches run on or after this date but before the Summer date MM DD format You can also automatically add extra products to the order based on the Summer and Winter dates They will be pulled into the order automatically RETURNED CONCRETE FLAGS Auto Fill If you enter a truck number and a returned quantity the last mix batched on this truck is pulled into this field Override Enabled If you are using returned concrete which is incompatible with the mix in the order an error pop occurs This field let
104. N MENU NOTE To shut down the Spectrum always follow the Shutdown Procedure given in this guide 02 09 10 24 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 MENU LAYOUT To help you understand how the Spectrum system functions we have provided a menu layout diagram on the following page There are many screens listed in the diagram but don t worry You don t have to know about them all Screens dealing with plant and system setup for instance are not even listed on your Main Menu Only those screens pertinent to running batches are listed on your Main Menu SuB MENUS As you look at the diagram on the next page notice that everything flows from the MAIN MENU The Main Menu is the gateway to all system functions including batching Menu items followed by a gt are sub menus For example the Data Entry item on the Main Menu is a sub menu of the Main Menu Similarly Update Inventory is a sub menu of the Data Entry Menu LISTED BESIDE A REPORT ITEM An asterisk is shown to the right of the some of Reports This means the report will be generated and sent directly to the printer when you select the item and press ENTER NOTHING LISTED BESIDE A REPORT ITEM Some reports have neither a gt or a beside them This means another screen appears so you can enter specific parameters for the report e g a range of dates Examples of these kinds of reports are Fleet U
105. O ESS 18 RESTARTING A NODE DURING THE DAY ccssssssccccecessssccecececeensseaecececeensaaeaecececsesssaeaecececsessnsnaeeeceesenes 19 BOOTINGINTO DOS iii ate 19 USING WINDOWS FROM THE SPECTRUM ccsssessscecececsesssececececsessasececececeeneuesececececsesssaeseescsenesaeceesesenes 20 SHUTDOWN PROCEDURE AOOO ceded sesesncscesededsdeseottsce sovesadecccccacesevidedecccdesdeiedididececsdsveiesidedesessesseete 20 G Quit Spectrum Procedure ais 20 Navigating the System ninia Rasa ZL PaE IIINE rd A IEEE AE E E E E E EEEE MOVING WITHIN SCREENS a a r a NN AEA ENER o Selecting a Field ad Moving from Field to Field Y Selecting Entries from Browseable Fields ooononnniniinn nivivnnnnniccccccrrrrrrrs 23 Accessing Field Help i ec cccccssssssssssscssscsescsesesesesesesesessscscscesssesesesesessseeeeeeseseseeeseseseseseaeaeeeeeeeeeaeas 24 EXITING MENUS AND SCREENS o occcccoconononononccononanonononccnonnnnonnnnncononnnnnnnnnncononnnnonnnnnonnnnnnno no pant Ee a oireena 24 Menu DEDI TI EEEE EE T E E EES LA E E A AE E 25 Listed Beside a Report tem occcccccccsssssesesssssesesssesssscssesesesesessseseseeeceeeeeeseaeseaeseasneenenseaeaeas 25 amp Nothing Listed Beside a Report Item csccccccsssssssesssssssesesesesesesesesseeeeeeeeseeeeeseseseseseneneateensnsnaeas 25 BASIC CTC Layout ad SL Curren DING sx e Be ait Pree i Me chit o che Tet Bhan o ae 28 EAS A Ta 28 Function Key Prompts for BAatchineg ccccccccccccsssscsssccssscs
106. ORDER or LOAD INDEX the mix code is filled in by the system and cannot be changed Otherwise browse this field to select a mix or type in the mix code Load Size Amount of concrete to be delivered in the truck You can edit this data if it was not sent from a Dispatch System Slump Slump value for mix You can change this value See To Change Mix Slump for more information Truck Code of the truck that will deliver the concrete You can select another truck When a truck is assigned the charge rate for the truck appears in the field Also the name of the driver appears just to the right of the charge rate The rate at which the truck will be loaded The percentage entered here means that the truck will be loaded at this percentage of the plant s discharge rate Example 50 entered here means the truck will be loaded at half the plant s discharge rate See Changing Discharge Rate later in this section for more information In Truck Amount of water in the truck before the load is batched The target for water will be reduced by this amount You can change this data Also used to increase water to add on the job 02 09 10 192 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 FIELD Ret Qty DESCRIPTION Amount of concrete in the truck returned from the previous load When this value is greater than zero the Returned Mix field also appears on the screen See the description
107. OUT YSDOT CLASS YSDOT CLASS YSDOT CLASS YSDOT CLASS YSDOT CLASS 1 3 STATE GRO YSDOT CLASS YSDOT CLASS YSDOT CLASS YSDOT CLASS YSDOT CLASS YSDOT CLASS YSDOT CLASS YSDOT CLASS YSDOT CLASS 2500 PSI BACKING 1 3 6 STATE CURB BACK CITY SIDEWALK CITY SIDEWALK WITH FLYASH 3600 PSI SIDEWALKS GRAVEL 2000 PSI SLABS 2000 PSI SIZE 7 2000 PSI SLAB 2000 PS TYPE 3 CITY BASE 3600 PSI CITY BASE CITY BASE FLY ASH CITY CURB 3000 PSI 182 GR PECR2E 2500 PSI WALL FOOTER 2500 PSI WALL FOOTER 5 BAG PEA GRAVEL 2500 PSI CR GR 2500 PSI FLATWORK NO AIR 2500 PSI CR GR 2500 PSI CLASS 2 PIPE ENC 5 BAG NO 1 STONE EN o QO OOOO A CG ITA T ooo GRAVEL WODMDAWAAADAHDHAWW Ww QA TOOTA GOG BRAGG D n m Hpi o o 9 2000 2020 2020G 2028 2041 2047 2054 2100 2100G 2121 2200 2222 2500SWL 2500SWLF 2521 2522 2522NA 2523 2524 2525 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 O 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 KKK KKK KK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KK KKK KKK KKK KK KKK 02 09 10 252 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 CUSTOMER LISTING Only part of the list is shown below Thursday Contact Phone Notes Account No Contact Phone Notes Account No LIN500 Contact Phone Notes Account No MUR140 Contact Phone Notes Account No 02 09 10 March 23
108. OVERVIEW screen pulls information from the MATERIAL ASSIGNMENTS and FEED DESTINATIONS screens so you can see at a glance all bin mapping for your plant This screen allows you to quickly change ingredients assigned to devices known as bin swapping For example you can select the same ingredient to be fed from two different bins during fast feed You can also turn mapping on or off for an ingredient This should not be done while a batch is in progress Material Overview Screen Plant Name E7 STONE LLLLLLLLIL LLLLLLLILL LLLLLLLLLL To swap ingredients for a bin silo 1 While a batch is not running press F3 from the BATCH SETUP screen select Material Overview and press ENTER You can also select MAIN MENU PLANT SETUP MATERIAL OVERVIEW In either case the MATERIAL OVERVIEW screen appears with the cursor on the first ingredient 2 Arrow down to the appropriate ingredient and bin combination Press F2 to pull up a Browse list of ingredients 3 Arrow down or up to the ingredient you want and press ENTER That ingredient replaces the old one 4 Press F1 to save your changes Notes Your changes will take effect on the next batch if you make a change or clear the Batch Setup screen e You can enable disable feeding for an ingredient bin by selecting N in its Active field 02 09 10 227 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24
109. RCTION REVS oiled E aoa ean waa hes va Gaeta aa ee aed 32 CUSTOMERS io a 33 lA ETE e A a ad 33 w TO A EN 34 INGREDIENTS erren e n r a A ebeanede cuusgnse uch vevonystaaese E a 35 E T 1 E E EE E E adh sets te EEA E E 36 6 lt Funcion Keysni a A has A 42 RCA 42 Absolute Value Ingredients cccccccccccscscsescsesesesesesesesesessssssnsesesesesesesesesesenenensseecseseseaeaeaeeeseeeeeeees 43 Go Percentage Ingredients uc nda tard ibid 43 Y Hundred Weight Ingredients oconnnninininvnvon rn 44 Ingredient Effectiveness cocoa 44 MEX DESIGNS arean a R E A E E deedse cus tusds tases eatentenveatectorentencsye 45 IS A RENT 45 E FUNCHAL oes RAL RAL Os ig at RSL a eds 48 S Po Create a Mix Designia wierd A teh RRR ATE 50 To Change an Ingredient in All Mixes cccccccccccscscsesesesesesesesesesesssencecuseeeeeeesesesesesesesenensaeeenenseaeas 5I To View Usage for a Single Mix Design oonnnnninin nio 51 To View Usage for All Mix Designs ccccccccsscscssscsestseseseseseseseneseseseeeeecscececeesesesesenenenenensnanseas 52 ANBI IDG DESIGNS AE EE E A E E E E E 53 MS MUCUS E AEE EAS rd 53 E 171A RO od 54 S To Create an Admix Design i mie arae Ea A diss E E E N E 55 Ulink Style Admix Modifiers cccceseececsseseseesssssscesesesessscssnsssseseseseseseseseseseceeseseseseseseneaenenenseseeees 56 RESALE PRODUCTS ista EE A O R Seven EE AEA EE TARE es 57 E A OR OA 57 S SHUNCHONKEY Sine heel e AB BAR EAE 59 Ingredients
110. STURE ACTUAL WATER SAND 1610 lb 16905 lb 16852 31 5 00 M 96 16 gl 57 STONE 1740 lb 17444 lb 17388 32 0 25 M 5 20 gl CEMENT I 450 lb 4500 lb 4488 27 COLD 28 0 gl 178 3 gl 176 4 1 07 176 44 gl AIR 3 50 oz 35 00 oz 36 38 3 94 REDUCER 16 75 oz 167 50 oz 169 00 0 90 SIMULATED NUM BATCHES 1 LOAD TOTAL 40213 lb WATER CEMENT 0 517T DESIGN WATER 280 0 gl ACTUAL WATER 277 8 gl TO ADD 2 2 gl WATER IN TRUCK 0 0 gl SLUMP 3 00 ADJUST WATER 0 0 gl load TRIM WATER 0 0 gl yd LOAD COMPLETED LOAD TIME 02 26 TARES AGG SCALE B 1 ST O ET 79 lb CEM SCALE B 1 ST 0 ET 8 lb WAT SCALE B 1 ST O ET 14 lb 02 09 10 213 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 TOLERANCE ERROR SYMBOLS Any or all of the symbols described below can appear on batch weight reports and on load tickets These symbols indicate the type of tolerance errors that occurred during a batch These symbols let the operator know if the material was out of tolerance over or under tolerance and whether re trying the scale read had any effect on the tolerance error The absence of these symbols means that no tolerance error occurred Asterisk Indicates that the material was either under or over tolerance on the first scale reading and that the operator pressed F6 Retry from the error pop to re read the scale Also means that the new scale reading was for whatever reason back in tolerance Plus Indicates that the material went over
111. Spectrum V6 Spectrum User Guide Version 6 24 2 9 2010 Command Alkon Inc 5168 Blazer Parkway Command Alkon Dublin Ohio 43017 A eee Service Dept 614 792 0677 Solutions To Build On Fax 614 793 0608 Part Number 25302 1970 2010 Command Alkon Incorporated All rights reserved Command Alkon Incorporated believes the statements contained herein are accurate as of the date of publication of this document HOWEVER COMMAND ALKON INCORPORATED HEREBY DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION ANY IMPLIED WARRANT OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE In no event will Command Alkon Incorporated be liable for any damages including any lost profits lost savings or other incidental or consequential damage arising out of the use of or inability to use any information provided through this publication even if Command Alkon Incorporated has been advised of the possibility of such damages or for any claim by any other party Some states do not allow the limitation or exclusion of liability or consequential damages so the above limitation may not apply This information is not intended to be an assertion of future action The contents of this document are for informational purposes only and are subject to change without notice Command Alkon Incorporated expressly reserves the right to change or withdraw current products that may or may not have the same characteristics listed in t
112. T COLD DARACCEL DARACEM 55 FINE AGG L FLYASH GRAV BLEND HOT MB VR MICRO AIR PORT ST M PORT WOOD PORTWOOD L POZZ POZZUTEC RHEOBUILD SAND TCG TYPE 3 02 09 10 CR GR CR STC 1 RD GR 100 XR 2 CR GR 220 N BLEND C CEMENT COLD DARACCEL DARACEM 55 FINE AGG L FLYASH GRAV BLEND HOT WATER B VR ICRO AIR PORT ST M PORT WOOD PORTWOOD L POZZ POZZUTEC RHEOBUILD SAND TCG TYPE 3 KKK OOD OO OO OO OO 0 0 OO 0 O DOD OOGO O 00000 END OF REPORT 250 9 505 017 3 342 546 0 0 589 759 22 532 4 265 182 6 585 320 733 899 0 5 000 2 386 523 0 4 890 358 0 28 332 7 799 0 290 390 0 19 691 10 000 22 000 6 545 948 0 00000 OO OO O79 O O00 0 00 02 0 00 000000 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 M x DESIGN LISTING Only the first few mix designs of many is shown below Thursday March 23 2000 MIX DESIGNS NAME 1000 E NYSDOT CLASS A INGREDIENT BLEND C SAND TCG PORT WOOD COLD MB VR 220 N POZZ 100 XR DARACCEL POZZUTEC 1000BG 1 1 STATE GROUT INGREDIENT SAND TCG 1374 0000 lb PORT WOOD 1215 0000 lb COLD 275 0000 lb 1010 DESCRIPTION NYSDOT CLASS A INGREDIENT 02 09 10 251 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 Mix DESIGN SUMMARY Only the first part of the report is shown Thursday March 23 2000 MIX DESIGN SUMMARY REPORT LIST SEQUENCE ALLOW MIX PRICE MODIFY CLASS 1 1 STATE GROUT YSDOT CLASS A YSDOT CLASS MS 10 BAG GR
113. T SCRIPT 1 Select MAIN MENU gt SYSTEM MAINTENANCE TICKET LAYOUT EDITOR A blank TICKET LAYOUT EDITOR screen appears 2 Press F2 to browse the ticket name field 3 Highlight the ticket script you wish to edit and press ENTER The ticket script appears on the screen 4 When editing remember that information is printed in the order it is entered on this screen Use the F5 Insert Line and the F6 Delete Line functions as appropriate 5 Press F1 to save your changes 02 09 10 142 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 PRINTER SETUP SCREEN In the previous section we learned how to create ticket scripts which control what to print on tickets as well as where to print it In this section we discuss the PRINTER SETUP screen which gives you even more control over ticket printing On this screen you can do the following Change the length and width of the ticket page Select which ticket script to use Choose to print or not to print delivery information on the top half of the ticket Cause the system to prompt you for a truck code before discharge can commence Save or not save batch weights to floppy disk Choose to print batch weights for each weigh cycle of a multi batch load Include exclude individual items from the batch weights portion of the ticket Note To prevent batch weights from printing on tickets you must set the Batch 02 09 10 Code field of the BATCH SETUP screen
114. TE JOB SAME AS CUSTOMER John H Slink Building 3994292 END OF REPORT 02 09 10 261 09 27 1999 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 PROJECTS By LAST USED DATE Last used date of March 23 2000 has been selected for the report below Thursday March 23 2000 PROJECTS BY LAST DATE USED Date Thursday March 23 2000 PROJECT PROJECT NAME gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt ADDRESS gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt 04 13 1998 ALKON CORP ACCOUNT NUMBER ALKON SLINK1 STATE JOB SAME AS CUSTOMER 09 22 1999 John H Slink Building 3994292 Slink END OF REPORT 02 09 10 262 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 RESALE PRODUCTS LISTING Thursday March 23 2000 RESALE PRODUCTS LISTING LIST PRICE ON HAND CALCIUM 554 3 CALCIUM T 6 000 oz 593 2 CALCIUM 0 oz 519 WASHOUT CHARGE 0 516 HEATED MATERIALS CHARGE 7 2222222222 512 FIBER MESH 510 SUPER PLASTICIZER 505 OVERTIME CHARGE 0532 CONVEYOR CHARGE a 524 288 SANDRESALE SAND SOLD SEPARATELY j SAND TCG denotes that the on hand amount for the product is in the ingredient displayed ee ok END OF REPORT K 02 09 10 263 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 C O D TICKETS Non C O D and All Ticket reports are laid out the same way so they are not shown Thursday March 23 2000 te C O D TICKETS EAR for Thursday March 23 2000 thru Thu
115. Targets for Remote Plant Ticket Report Logging Remote Alt Ticket ScoreBoard Plant Screen Color 101 Weighmaster Company Division Address Address P 0 Box City State Zip Code Batch on Receipt N Enable Auto Truck to Loading Enable Auto Truck to Washdown Default User Code Alternate Plant Name 5 From any Spectrum screen press CTRL P to print a copy of the screen If the screen is printed correctly the printer is ready to use You can also use CTRL P to print a report to test the printer although there probably won t be any data except for the headers etc FIELDS PLANT SCREEN FIELD Name DESCRIPTION Name assigned to this plant Browseable field Code Code assigned to this plant Browseable field Color Browseable list of colors by number that you can assign to trucks assigned to this plant This also changes the color of the Run bar at the top of the screen There are 15 colors from which to choose Each of the 15 numbers across the top of the screen is displayed in the color associated with that number The browse list gives a text description of the color for each number Next Ticket Number Next ticket number that will be used for this plant This number can be up to six digits long You only need to change this number when you want to start numbering tickets all over again from zero Loading Time Default loading tim
116. Ticket Alias File e You can also enter basic math operators for addition for subtraction for multiplication and P for division between the aliases for data fields Example PRINT 40 Prod_Ord Prod_Del 0 p6 2 In this example the amount to be delivered Product_Ordered Product_Delivered would be printed in column 40 Up to 6 digits including 2 decimal places could be printed 0 00 would be printed for a zero value Instance Refers to a particular resale product within the order Delivery Charge is always instance 2 Mix Design is always instance 1 For all Resale Loops leave this field set to 0 The system automatically increments through all instances Format Several different formats are available depending on the type of data being printed on the ticket e Example of format for an alphanumeric string 20 means the field can be no longer than 20 characters e Examples of formats for numeric strings 8 2 means 8 digits with 2 decimal places p8 2 means 8 digits 2 decimal places and do not print the number if it is equal to zero 0 000 c8 2 means 8 digits 2 decimal places decimal point separator and do not print the number if it is equal to zero 0 000 Press F2 from the Format field to see more examples 02 09 10 135 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 mw FUNCTION KEYS FUNCTION KEY PURPOSE 02 09 10 Sh F4 Print Setup Takes you
117. Time 2 Press F2 to browse a list of dates Select the date for which you wish to edit manual event information and press ENTER 3 Move to the Event ID field and press F2 to browse a list of manual events for the selected date Press ENTER The appropriate manual event information appears on the screen 4 Ifyou do not want this material deducted from inventory tab down to the Deduct amount from inventory field and enter N Otherwise leave this field set to Y the default setting Press ENTER The cursor moves to the blank comments section 5 Enter comments if needed then press F1 to save the data Timesaver To cause this screen to always appear when the End of Day process is run and there are manual events to edit set the Edit MM Description field of the END OF DAY SETUP screen to Y 02 09 10 69 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 SLUMP TABLES WHAT IS SLUMP Slump is defined as the number of inches or millimeters concrete will sag or slump when a cone filled with the concrete is turned upside down and the cone pulled off the concrete Spectrum is capable of adjusting the slump of each load of concrete to meet the needs of customers especially when those needs are subject to state and governmental requirements SLUMP CALCULATIONS SIMPLIFIED There are several ways in Spectrum to adjust the slump of a load of concrete e You can enter a default slump value for a mix on the Mix Designs scr
118. Used as Resale Products scccccccssssssssesescststsesesssssesesesesssseeeeeseeeeeseseseseseneneenensnanaeas 60 Recording Incoming Inventory Resale PrOdUcts scscccccssssssvsvseseseseseseseeceteteeseseseseseusnsesenensnaeas 61 A NN 62 O O NOOO 62 Go Function A A A 63 PROJECTS cas 64 S Pieds rninn E NAE OA AR A E OTAN i a 65 E AA CA AA 67 bb Project PriciMg AEE E EA rana 67 Consistence and Ext Description cocinar 68 EDIT MMM DESCRIPTION css cesccetosevunseeteiscedscnytasvssntentbscuviessDintendbveudeusds suounsve dadas ESER EE dd cb dla dicos 69 DEUMPVABLES aaa ea 70 S What aaa 70 Slump Calculations Simplified ccccccccccssecessssssesesesescsesesesesesesesessscssscsseseseseseseseeeeseaeaeeesensesnseas 70 S Seting Up Slump Tables cota tia tia agg habeas cs ests neces canta ee a sds 72 Calculating Slump Using Slump Tables ccccccccccsssesessssssseseseseseseeeseseseseeceeeesesesesesenenenseeeenensnaeas 73 Configuring Plant Devices oomsssssssss 79 BINS SCREEN orner eae a EE Rp ETETA ANE EA EEEa E Ep NEEE Ea AEEA aE E OENE ETEN P AEE RERE 76 S ON 77 Feed Configurations issis iii enirinte AE NEE EEE E i E 81 02 09 10 4 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 A NS RN NN me Possible Feed Configuration SCALES SCREEN ss cssescssssststeacisassasssebsensvessssescss oes S Fields e SOS ERR SPR MOON DC A vcs ieee ROE mu WR OO Flow Control Dampenil8 oonnmccnnnnmnmnmnnnr rra TT o T E E E O
119. User s Guide Ver 6 24 Example 3 02 09 10 Default slump is 75mm and we want a 25mm slump We would be subtracting 50mm of slump Using our Metric slump table and starting from the Default row we can see that two steps would be used the 25mm step and the 50mm one Water to Add Water Amt per Mix Unit Sum of Percentages 100 Water to Add 100 for 25mm step 150 for 50mm step 5 0 100 250 5 0 100 250 05 12 5L 74 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 CONFIGURING PLANT DEVICES Plant devices can be configured through screens accessed from the PLANT SETUP menu This is an important part of the installation process because there is a lot of fine tuning that takes place Critical parameters that control material feeding and discharge are entered on these screens In addition to these parameters Input Output points are also assigned for each device NOTE Make sure you have added ingredients before you configure devices through the Plant Setup screens Plant Setup Menu Batch Setup aterial Overview ins amp Silos Scales Decumulative Scales Metered Liquids Admixture Bottles Holding Tanks Conveyor Belts Extra Devices Events Truck Device Mixers Material Assignments Sequences Feed Destinations Quick Edit Calibration amp Test gt 02 09 10 75 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 BINS SCREEN Bins and silos must be set up before you can assign materia
120. Ver 6 24 CONVEYOR BELTS If conveyor belts are used they should be set up on the CONVEYOR BELTS screen This should be done before you assign feed destinations to each device As with many Spectrum screens you can go directly to other related screens from this one For instance you can press F4 to go to the I O Assignments screen or F6 to go to the Feed Destinations screen Conveyor Belts Screen Belt Codel Belt Name Keyboard Hold Allow Early Feed Start Stop Mode Ignore Hold Start Delay Seconds Horn Blow Time Seconds Belt Clear Time Seconds Start Stop Pulse Seconds FIELDS FIELD DESCRIPTION Code Browseable list of conveyor belts Name Description of the conveyor belt Keyboard Hold Browseable list of function keys The one selected can be used on the Graph screen to hold this belt Allow Early Feed Yes No field enables disables freewheeling for this device Start Stop Mode Running mode of the belt Choices are Y means the system sends a pulse to start the belt then another pulse to stop it N means the system sends a continuous signal to start the belt and keep it running When the system stops sending the signal the belt stops running 02 09 10 100 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 DESCRIPTION Ignore Hold Y means this device ignores hold signals from the operator Prevents belts and diverters from becoming jammed if they stop moving
121. Y CONST S TOMER ADDRES CUSTOMER CODE LIN500 ORDER CODE 2 ECT CODE TICKET NUMBER TRUCK BY ORDER PLANT MIX E CODE LOAD SIZE UNIT TAX CHARGE TOTAL CHARGI 8819 03 23 2000 779 8820 03 23 2000 779 ORDER TOTALS CUSTOMER TOTALS 01 01 2000 2000 10 00 yd 10 00 yd 20 00 02 09 10 266 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 MATERIAL COSTS Only part of the report is shown Thursday March 23 2000 L238 CUSTOMER ORDER TICKET LISTING for Thursday March 23 2000 thru Thursday March 23 2000 CUSTOMER NAME Evans Building Supply CUSTOMER CODE Evans CUSTOMER ADDRESS ORDER CODI PROJECT E BY ORDER TICK RUCK PLA LOAD TOTAL NUMB NAMI E UNIT CHARGE 8816 03 23 2000 01 00 yd A 109 52 8817 03 23 2000 01 9 00 yd A 0 00 8818 03 23 2000 01 ORDER TOTALS CUSTOMER TOTALS 2257 328 57 CUSTOMER NAME LINDSEY CONST CUSTOMER CODE LIN500 CUSTOMER ADDRESS ORDER CODI PROJECT CODE BY ORDER TICKET DATE TRUCK PLA LOAD TOTAL NUMBER 1 E UNIT CHARGE 8819 03 23 2000 779 8820 03 23 2000 779 0 00 ORDER TOTALS CUSTOMER TOTALS 02 09 10 267 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 FLEET UTILIZATION Thursday March 23 2000 12 19 FLEET UTILIZATION REPORT for Thursday March
122. YOUT EDITOR SCREEN ccccccccecececececececececececececececececececececececececececececececececececececececesecess 132 re A E 133 02 09 10 5 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 re Function Keys THE TICKET ALIAS FILE Go FitldS ooonnnnnniinnnino To Add an Alias Name amp To Change an Alias Name iia CREATING A NEW TICKET SCRIPT s is ss c cceccsesvecssesstceccivssvesdeceteasdsevssueesdesessugesvcecdedcbdecesuaveedupssvsscssuatdeese ss SPECIFYING WHICH TICKET SCRIPT TO USE EDITING AN EXISTING TICKET SCRIPT ccccccsssssccecececsesseaececececsesseaecececccsessaaecececceseseeaaeseceesesensaaeeeeess Printer Setup OTE nai iras L43 FIELDS PRINTER SETUP SCREEN cccssssssccececsesssaececececsesseaececececsessaeeesececseseaaaecececeesesaaeceeececsensaaeeeeess MUETIEBATCH PRINTING AOO EEES E ESEO E setae de stecnstesouseste desde SELECTING BATCH WEIGHT ITEMS FOR PRINTING BAR CODE PRINTING cccscsecsececececsessececececeesesseceseeeceesenssaeeeeeees Y Example Printing a Bar Code Ticket Number we Bar Code Escape Sequences iicts siccsesscestvescsesovssesconseectsnscdeseiessnestseviegricetsosteseesevnicadsovavesastesotseaveise wm Print Bar Code Escape Sequence ia AA AAA AA es Sea RH me Ticket Layout Editor Entries seccion consiente Aaaa eee ETE T aiena Conficuring a Potro taa Lo TO SETUPA PRINTER ip 150 Fields Port Parameters Screen ccccccccccccsccscsssssssss
123. access rights than the ALKON user For instance a manager would not need access to order entry customers and other database screens He she would however need access to reports and inventory screens User Security Setup Manager User Code User Security Setup Report Menu Plant Setup Menu Inventory Menu System Maintenance Menu Batch Setup Screen View Batch Weights Screen Customers amp Sales Taxes Screens Ingredients Screen Price Screen Custom Equation Editor Add Delete Equipment Quick Ticket Screen Disable Load Index Editing Demand Plant Batching Load Index Screen Projects Screens Mini Dispatch Mix and Admix Design Screens Orders amp Tickets Resale Products Screen System Defaults amp User Screens User Login Screen Allow User to Start Batch with RUN Allow Batch from Yesterday s Orders Allow RUN From All Screens End of Day Screen amp Utility Menu Node 1 Only Batchbook Base and Cement Screens If you select USER in the User Code field the following screen appears with another set of access rights Load Index Batch Setup Price End of Day etc User Security Setup Alkon User Code User Security Setup Report Menu Plant Setup Menu Inventory Menu System Maintenance Menu Batch Setup Screen View Batch Weights Screen Customers amp Sales Taxes Screens Ingredients Screen Price Screen Custom Equation Editor Add Delete Equipment Quick Ticket Screen Disable L
124. ags it will be printed as if the action were PRINT 6 8LPI switches between 6 and 8 lines per inch RESALE_EX keeps the system from duplicating a product within the resale loop This must be entered directly before the RESALE action You may enter up to three of these exclusions per ticket REVERSE performs a reverse linefeed If batch weights are to be printed the system waits until they are printed before it reverses This is used for forms tear off Column Specifies the column on the ticket where the item listed under Data will be printed If this column number plus the length of the field to be printed exceeds the Ticket Width entered in PRINTER SETUP the system selects a lower column number so the complete field can be printed For example Ticket Width 80 and you want to print the date at column 75 The date is an 8 character field so the column would be adjusted to 72 and you would be warned of this action For actions that do not use columns i e RESALE the column number should always be 0 02 09 10 134 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 DESCRIPTION ACTION Data Data to be printed on the ticket at the specified column Can be selected from the F2 browse list e For the TEXT action this data is the actual text to be printed on the ticket e g disclaimers e For the PRINT and PRINT_ALT actions this data is an Alias name for the actual database field See The
125. alue is calculated by the system This value is the amount of liquid that enters the mix after the valve is closed The system subtracts this amount from the target amount then closes the valve at the new target amount Preact Override Amount Any non zero amount entered here is used as the preact instead of what is calculated by the computer Plant Erraticness Takes into account variations in accuracy for the metering device The system closes the valve when the liquid dispensed equals the target minus Preact minus Plant Erraticness Valve B Shutoff Used to prevent water hammers due to remaining pressure which causes the target to be exceeded When the amount dispensed nears the target the larger valve Valve B is shut and the smaller valve Valve A remains open until the target is reached Coast Settle Time Length of time in seconds required for the pump motor to completely stop running 02 09 10 94 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 FIELD DESCRIPTION Start Delay Length of time in seconds the system waits before starting discharge for this metered liquid Hold Feed Browseable field of I O points for the tank hold limit switch Automatically shuts the valve if a problem is detected by the system Valve A Browseable list of I O points for the Valve A feed output Valve B Browseable list of I O points for the Valve B feed output 02 09 10 95 Spe
126. an 2 seconds Automatically adjusted by the computer using the Jog Time Adjust value Jog Time Override A non zero value in this field overrides the Jog Time value and opens the gate for this length of time for each jog NOTE Use this with caution The Jog Time is a learned value Jog Time Adjust This time is added to or subtracted from the Jog Time to produce a new Jog Time so the next jog can attempt to achieve the Jog Weight 02 09 10 79 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 FIELD DESCRIPTION PAGE 2 BINS SCREEN Flow Control Yes No field that allows disallows the system to open Enabled and close the gate to maintain a constant flow rate If this field is set to N the system opens the gate all the way then closes it once loading is done Time between Flow Length of time between the computer s flow rate Calculations calculations Maximum Flow Rate Maximum flow rate allowed in scale units per second Minimum Flow Rate Minimum flow rate allowed in scale units per second Start Delay Number of seconds to wait before feeding or discharging actually starts Flow Start Delay Length of time in seconds the system waits after loading has begun to check the flow rate This is necessary because the flow rate is erratic at the start of a load Open Time at Start Length of time in seconds the gate should be opened at the start of the loading the truck o
127. and Batch Setup screens to return to the screen you were on when you initiated washout e Another way to initiate truck washout is by pressing SHIFT F3 from the Load Index the Order Index or Batch Setup screens Pressing SHIFT F3 a second time starts the washout load the same way as described above When truck washout is complete you are returned to the screen from which you initiated truck washout e A third way to initiate and start truck washout is to press F3 from the Batch Setup screen to pull up a menu Select Truck Washout from the menu and press ENTER The washout mix is loaded onto the Batch Setup screen Press F9 to start the washout load When washout is complete escape back to the blank Batch Setup screen 02 09 10 232 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 MIXER OPERATION FOR PLANTS WITH MIXERS OVERVIEW gt TO MAKE EXPLANATION SIMPLER THIS OVERVIEW ASSUMES THE MIXER IS SET FOR AUTOMATIC OPERATION To start the mixer motor the operator presses and holds the START button until the motor starter is engaged and locked up through its auxiliary contacts to power provided by the normally closed STOP switch The START switch lamp comes on and stays on once the starter is engaged If an I O has been assigned to the Running Input on the Mixers screen Spectrum checks to make sure the mixer is running Spectrum also checks for the presence of the Tilted Opened signal which indicates that th
128. ank NOTE If you enter your own file path name the directories you enter must already exist on the hard drive The Spectrum will not create them Serial Parallel Browseable field Port type S for serial or P for parallel Default is P For a dial up serial printer or a directly connected printer select S For a parallel printer select P Device Name Browseable field which displays a list of parallel and serial ports Default is dev par1 for the first parallel port The ports on the back of the computer are labeled appropriately Protocol Browseable field Form in which data is sent or received R is the default Choices are R Raw used for printing tickets and reports normally L Link 20 for sending data to Spectrum Ver 4 x U Universal for sending data over a Universal Interface B Boral for sending data over a Boral Interface I Incoming for receiving data via a Link 20 interface S Score Board H Hanson W Water Controller D Scale Display 02 09 10 151 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 DESCRIPTION Tracepoints This field determines whether tracepoints are enabled and recorded in the Error file for debugging Options are Y enable Tracepoints N do not enable Tracepoints V enable Tracepoints and provide more details in the Error file The V is short for Verbose Flow Co
129. any batch results Tuesday September 26 2000 ENR BATCH WEIGHTS REPORT for Tuesday September 26 2000 thru Tuesday September 26 2000 CUSTOMER TICKET NO LOAD NO PLANT NAME BATCH SETUP 8899 8909 01 TRUCK USER LOGIN DRIVER TICKET NUM TICKET ID TIME DATE 779 ALKON RICHARD 8899 IST 13717 09 26 2000 LOAD SIZE MIX CODE SEQ LOAD ID 10 00 yd 3500 wW 429 MATERIAL DESIGN QTY REQUIRED BATCHED VAR ABSP SMOISTURE ACTUAL WAT SAND 1610 lb 16905 lb 16880 al DS 5 00 M 96 32 gl 57 STONE 1740 lb 17444 lb 17414 LTE 0 25 M 5 20 gl CEMENT I 450 lb 4500 lb 4482 40 COLD 28 0 gl 178 3 gl 176 4 07 176 36 gl AIR 3 50 oz 35 00 oz 36 38 94 REDUCER 16 75 oz 167 50 oz 169 00 90 SIMULATED NUM BATCHES 1 LOAD TOTAL 40261 lb WATER CEMENT 0 517T DESIGN WATER 280 0 gl ACTUAL WATER 277 9 gl TO ADD 2 1 gl WATER IN TRUCK 0 0 gl SLUMP 3 00 ADJUST WATER 0 0 gl load TRIM WATER LOAD COMPLETED LOAD TIME 02 27 TARES AGG SCALE B 1 ST O ET 94 1b CEM SCALE B WAT SCALE B 1 ST 0 ET 14 Ilb NOTE When oven dry mixes are used the 7 MOISTURE and ACTUAL WAT column labels will read 7 FREE WAT and FREE WATER respectively 02 09 10 241 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 BATCH WEIGHTS REPORT BY LOAD Note The sample report below does not contain all the items that can be printed For a more complete list see Common Items on Batch Weight Reports 1 Select Main Menu Reports Batch Weight Reports Batch We
130. are displayed in different colors depending their load status Press F5 from the Load Index to pull up a list explaining what each color means re FIELDS LOAD NDEX FIELD DESCRIPTION Time Time the order is to be batched Truck Truck assigned to the ticket If the ticket was generated from COMMANDbatch the truck number will not appear Mix Code Mix code to be batched for the ticket Load Size Load size to be batched Notes Special instructions attached to the ticket Ret d Amount Mix Amount and mix code of the returned mix if any Design 02 09 10 178 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 wm FUNCTION KEYS LOAD NDEX FUNCTION KEY SHIFT F5 If you are viewing orders for any day other than today pressing this key combination pulls up orders for today SHIFT F7 Press this key combination to view orders for previous dates Each time you press this key combination you go back one day SHIFT F8 Press this key combination to view orders for future dates Each time you press this key combination you go forward one day F1 Batch Setup Takes you directly to the BATCH SETUP screen Information for the highlighted order is automatically pulled onto this screen F3 Batch Weights Pulls up the batch weights for the highlighted order If no batches have been run against the order the Required and Batched weights will contain zeros
131. ase table This information includes things like tax rate credit limit credit status and whether the customer allows returned concrete This information can be inserted directly into the Orders or Projects screens To access this table select MAIN MENU gt DATA ENTRY CUSTOMERS The screen shown next appears Customers Screen Customer Code Customer Name E Account Number Account Status Credit Limit User Defined Account Balance Tax Zone Returned Concrete Allowed C 0 D Print Prices Address Address P 0 Box City State County Zip Postal Code Contact Name Phone Number Notes gt FIELDS DESCRIPTION Customer Code Unique code assigned to the customer You may browse this field to see a list of customers in the database Customer Name Full name given to the customer Account Number Account number assigned to the customer account Used for tracking purposes only Customer Code is the main identifier of the customer account Account Status Status assigned to the customer account This is a free form entry field and is used for informational purposes only Ifa status is entered in this field it will be pulled onto the PROJECTS screen when a project is created for this customer 02 09 10 33 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 DESCRIPTION Credit Limit Customer s credit limit If an order for this customer exceeds this limit an error message is displayed at
132. assign the Ingredient to more than one Group In the above case you can make the Cementitious ingredient a member of two Groups Cements and CemAdx with CemAdx being the user defined additional Group The Cement 02 09 10 123 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 based on and correction calculations can still work on all Ingredients in the Cements Group and the Admixture based on Cements calculation can specify that it will only use Cementitious Ingredients in the CemAdx Group Note Only one Admixture can be used to correct the Water Group using the correction factor entered for the Admixture ingredient STANDARD CONFIGURATION The standard configuration for the Material Calculations screen is shown in the following table Position Group 1 Group 2 Type Factor Recalculate Trace Comments Target 1 2 CEM 2 CEM x 0 000 N N 2 2 CEM 4 ADX B 0 000 N N 3 4 ADX 4 ADX E 0 000 N N 4 2 CEM F 0 000 N N 5 2 CEM R 1 000 N N 6 4 ADX 3 WAT C 1 000 N N 7 5WATADX 3 WAT S 1 000 N N 8 5 WATADX 1 AGG S 0 000 N N 9 ALL T 0 000 N N 10 ALL A 0 000 N N 11 1 AGG 3 WAT M 0 000 Y N 12 3 WAT 3 WAT C 0 000 N N 13 3 WAT 3 WAT x 0 000 N N 14 ALL L 0 000 N N FIELDS MATERIAL CALCULATIONS SCREEN Position Number that specifies the order in which the calculation is performed in relation to all calculations listed on this screen G
133. assigning a system generated device code in the form PSETnnn where nnn is a value from 000 to 999 For example if you were creating a new property set record for a scale the PSET number would appear in the Code field of a copy of the SCALES screen 3 Change the appropriate data on the new property set record For example you might select a different Input or Output 4 Press F1 to exit the new record and return to the FEED DESTINATIONS screen then press F1 again to save the new property set record 02 09 10 110 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 EDITING AN EXISTING PROPERTY SET 1 On the FEED DESTINATIONS screen position the cursor in the Property Set column on the row containing the desired source device and press F3 The property device record appears for editing Note that the Code field is displayed in yellow and is not editable Make the desired changes to the record and press F1 to save the record and return to the FEED DESTINATIONS screen DELETING A DEVICE PROPERTY SET On the FEED DESTINATIONS screen position the cursor on the row containing the desired source device and press F4 The system displays the following prompt Press F8 to delete Property Set PSETnnn Esc to continue Press F8 to blank the field Note The actual property set record will not be deleted until you save the FEED DESTINATIONS screen MANUAL MATERIAL MONITORING OF PSET l O s PSET IO s for a given d
134. ata to USB Winlink Ticket File Export Export Tickets to DOS File Winlink Material Records Export Export Material Records to QC Helper Edit MMM Description Special Procedures Special Procedures x Special Procedures 4 On the top half of the screen enter the number of copies to print for each report Leave a zero for each report you do not want printed 5 On the bottom half of the screen enter a Y for each procedure you want to run 6 Press F1 to save your entries 7 Press ESC to return to the Setup selection box if you need to select another category to set up 8 Repeat steps 3 through 7 for each remaining category End of Week End of Month and End of Year IMPORTANT NOTES e Clear and Reset Inventory should be set to Y so inventory totals are always reset e If you purchased the Winlink product refer to the User s Manual for file export information e For End of Day and End of Week setups you can enter Y for either Backup Data to Floppy or Backup Data to USB not both e End of Month Inventory Report Flag You can select the current working month in the Set the Current Working Month for Automatic EOM Operation field of the End of Month Setup screen so the system will automatically remind you if you haven t run an End of Month Inventory report If the report needs to be run the End of Month screen automatically 02 09 10 273 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 appears wh
135. ate2 Open Alt Bin After Sec Flow Under Gate2 Close Vibrator On If Flow Below Flow Start Delay Open Time At Start Open Adjust Pulse Close Time At Start Close Adjust Pulse Scale Empty Hold Empty Scale Open Zero Tolerance Over Scale Settle Time Zero Tolerance Under Max Gate Close Time Turn Vibrator On Gate Close Forced Gate Wide Open Start Delay Set the Flow Control Enabled field to Y Save your changes and close the Scales screen From the Main Menu select Plant Setup gt Calibration amp Test gt Scale Meter T O The Scale Meter I O screen appears 02 09 10 91 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 Scale Meter I O Screen CEM SCALE LOAD METER Mixer 1 WAT SCALE MUUUMMEUNANANNN AAA A ll A aa Sh F4 to print event log 9 Enter a value from 0 01 to 0 99 in the Damp Factor field A value of 0 1 is recommended 10 Save your changes The following message appears This change will cause weighing errors and will be reported Proceed Y N 11 Press the Y key to continue The following warning message appears Configuration has changed system must be rebooted F4 to clear this Warning 12 Press lt F4 gt to clear the warning message 13 Reboot the RTC Note Flow information can be logged to a file for further analysis See the separate document titled Flow Control Dampening for more information about this service tool 02 09 10 92 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6
136. ates to be dampened to allow more precise feed cutoff calculations and drop determinations 6 21A USB Support for Backups and Data Transfers This feature allows Spectrum data to be backed up and exported to a USB device as well as restored data from a USB device The USB device is typically a QNX formatted thumb drive and replaces the Zip drive and disk 6 23B 02 09 10 17 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 POWER UP AND SHUTDOWN PROCEDURES POWER UP PROCEDURE The Spectrum System s power up procedure involves two steps which should always be performed in the following order 1 Turning on the Spectrum computer and 2 Turning on plant power If the Spectrum was not properly shut down before it was turned off it automatically rebuilds the database Otherwise the Spectrum starts immediately Once the Spectrum is turned on the MAIN MENU shown below is displayed You can now turn on the plant power Main Menu Batch Setup Load Index Demand Batching Dispatch Data Entry Order Index Reports End of Day Plant Setup System Maintenance Quit Spectrum User Login Sales Order Number Version NOTE Control power to the Manual Station should always be left on 02 09 10 18 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 RESTARTING A NODE DURING THE DAY CAUTION Nodes other than Node 1 can be restarted without causing data corruption problems If you must restart Node 1 ask A
137. ation 02 09 10 199 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 02 09 10 Note If the ticket has already started to print before you have saved your data the new or revised truck information will not be printed on the ticket You would have to go to the Edit Ticket screen to edit the truck information then reprint the ticket T Option in the Ticket Script Typically this method is used if you don t want to select a truck until the mixer is ready to discharge into a truck This way you can wait to see which truck is ready for the load Note If this method is used the ticket will not print until the truck code is verified To use this method 1 Goto SYSTEM MAINTENANCE PRINTER SETUP and select the appropriate Node Number Printer Setup Screen with T argument Node Number Default Login User Code Record Batch Weights to Disk Print Top Half of Ticket Record Log Ticket Page Length Ticket Page Width Ticket ea i Set EPSON mode 2 Add the T argument to the script in the Ticket Script Name s field as shown in the example above Press F1 to save your data 4 Then when you run a batch without entering a truck code the system will prompt you with the following message 200 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 Truck Code Message Truck code must be verified before Ticket_ID 536 will print Ref Load_ID 651 Press lt Alt A gt to bring up Truck Assignment screen F to clear this
138. ations for plant equipment were entered 02 09 10 93 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 Maximum Capacity DESCRIPTION Read only field Maximum capacity of the tank in metered units This value comes from the Scale and Meter I O Setup screen where E Z Cal Manual Station configurations for plant equipment were entered Keyboard Hold Browseable list of function keys The one selected can be used on the Graph screen to hold this device from discharging Allow Early Feed Yes No field enables disables freewheeling for this scale Display Group Browseable list of group color numbers in which to display this device on the Graph screen These color numbers correspond to the colors selected for the Graph screen on the Batching Defaults screen Skip Zero Check Yes No field that allows disallows zero checking for this device i e checking to see if scale is within zero range Flow Start Delay Length of time in seconds the system waits after the valves are opened to check if the flow rate is between the maximum and minimum flow rates Switch to Alternate These fields work together The system switches to the Tank After sec alternate tank if the flow rate stays below the If Flow If Flow Rate Below Rate Below amount for the number of seconds shown in Ib sec the Switch to Alternate Tank After field NOTE Bin Mapping must be enabled on the Batching Defaults screen Preact Amount This v
139. available N means the truck is not up on the BATCH SETUP screen 02 09 10 62 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 DESCRIPTION Truck Type Browseable field that may contain one of the following values e N Normal ready mix truck e C Conveyor truck e F Front discharging truck Description Description of the truck License Plate License plate number of the truck Expiration Date Expiration date of the truck s license plates FUNCTION KEYS FUNCTION KEY PURPOSE F1 Save F2 Browse Pulls up a list of possible entries Browseable fields have these brackets F7 Clear Cancels changes before you have saved them FS Delete Deletes the truck record currently displayed When prompted press this key again to confirm 02 09 10 63 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 PROJECTS Information about projects is stored in the Projects database table Projects are added and edited on the PROJECTS screen To access this screen select MAIN MENU DATA ENTRY PROJECTS Created Customer Code Notes Addr Order PO Required Restrict Products C 0 D Print Prices Returned Mix Allowed Project Screen Modified Project Codel Name E StatusIN Account Number Account Status Contact Phone Number Tax Zone End Date Last Date Each project record includes the products pricing and projected quantiti
140. avel Wait 10 00 yd 01 10 00 yd 01 10 00 yd 01 Delivered 30 0 yd Averages END OF REPORT 02 09 10 257 Time 08 29 Spacing 10 Wash Travel Return Time 09 29 Spacing Wash Travel Return 22222 22222 11 29 PISS RNA Time 10 29 Spacing 10 Wash Travel Return 2222 11 54 11 54 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 ORDERS By PLANT Thursday March 23 2000 ERE ORDER SUMMARY BY PLANT for Thursday March 23 2000 thru Thursday March 23 2000 Times shown are average minutes in each status Evans Building Order Units Wash Trip Number Deliver Hour YARDS Down i Travel Hours 222 22722 LINDSEY CONST Order Units Trip Number Deliver Hour YARDS i Travel Hours 29199 BOO MURDOCK HOMES Order Units Trip Number Deliver Hour YARDS i Travel Hours RIDAD AEA 227 27 Company Averages 0 0 0 22 20 0 10 0 s A PETE EPERE END OF REPORT 02 09 10 258 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 PROJECT LISTING Thursday March 23 2000 PROJECTS Date Thursday March 23 2000 PROJECT CODE PROJECT CUSTOMER CODE ALKON NAME PROJECT NAME gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt NAME ALKON CORP ADDRESS ADDRESS gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt ACCOUNT ACCOUNT NUMBER END DATE 04 13 1998 LAST DATE 04 13 1998 lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt ALKON TEST NUMBER 1 gt gt gt gt gt lt lt lt
141. ble for each mix design You can also create a default slump table and select it on the Batching Defaults screen This table will then be used if Slump Tables are enabled on the Batching Defaults screen but no slump table has been attached to the mix design Sample slump tables are shown next one using US units the other using Metric Slump Table Using US Units SLUMP Slump Code SLUMP US Nai S SLUMP TABLE Slump Change Percent Adjustment Amount of Change Cumulative Change fe 3 PH Zis 100 19 250 90 150 29 100 11 i 50 50 per Step per Step per Step 400 00 00 5 00 2 90 1 00 gl gl gl gl Mix Default 1 25 il 1 00 gl 2 50 0 1 80 gl 3 75 0 2 40 gl h 100 0 2 60 gl 5 125 0 2 10 gl cl C Lear Delete Slump Table Using Metric Units SLUMP Slump Code SLUMP METR Description METRIC SLUMP TABLE Slump Change Percent Adjustment Amount of Change Cumulative Change per Step per Step per Step 4 400 y 0 250 e 150 a 100 Mix Default 1 25 oe 90 3 79 4 100 9 125 L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L Sar Clear Delete 02 09 10 71 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 A description of each column on the Slump Table is given in the following table Column i Description Slump Change The different amounts of slump typically used for concrete mix designs This information is read only Percent
142. ble to the global variable For example the user could enter CEM SCALE_ATAR on the Custom Controls Editor Then when the system was rebooted the system would create the variable as global 6 204 Junction Box Test in Training Mode You can now use the Junction Box Test function when no manual station is attached To do this set the Default Simulation field on the Batching Defaults screen to T Then you can toggle IO points on the Junction Box Test screen 6 20A Main ScoreBoard Starts Device Based ScoreBoards The main ScoreBoard program now starts device based scoreboard programs if any are defined before checking for the main scoreboard 6 20A IO Values Sent as ASCII from Serial Ports IO values can now be sent in ASCII format from a serial port The following two serial converters that take in serial data and output 4 20mA can be used Advantech Model ADAM 4020 www advantech com icpdas Model I 7021 www icpdas com 6 20A 02 09 10 16 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 FEATURE DESCRIPTION Motion Detection Motion Detection ensures that a scale s reading is stable before its value is recorded 6 21A Auto Bin Switching Auto Bin Switching causes the system to automatically select an alternate source without operator intervention when a feed timeout occurs 6 21A Flow Control Dampening Flow Control Dampening allows scale flow r
143. ceeseseseseseeeseeneeeees 110 Editing an Existing Property Set ccccccssssssssssssssssesesesesesesesesesensseacscsceseceseseseseseseeeeesenseenenenseaeas 111 Deleting a device property SCt cccccccccccssscscscsesesesesessssssssscseseseseseseseseseseseseeceeseseseseseneneneenensnaeas 111 Manual Material Monitoring of PSETIO S ooonnnccicninnnnnnnnncccs 111 Batching amp System Defaults sccicccscceiccccesscscacvasseasevs sievacecseceuvs diana LS BATCHING DEFAULTS SCREEN ad coi todos 113 A A E CEES EC EE E OPRE TENET We PP EEE EE POETS E Oe Bee nea E nee 114 SYSTEMIDERAUE Sodi 119 O TR 120 Material Calculations Screen moomcsmossmsssss 123 OVERVIE Nin na aa al ss aes Ds ena totes 123 STANDARD CONFIGURATION cd tae ica 124 FIELDS MATERIAL CALCULATIONS SCREEN sccsccccccecsssssseceeececseseaececececeeseuececeeeeseseaaeceeececsessaaeaeeess 124 FUNCTION KEYS MATERIAL CALCULATIONS SCREEN cssccccccecscssssscecececeesensscecececeesenssaeceeceeesessaeaeeees 125 MATERIAL CALCULATION TYPES iecvssseseeeccccsessceigececcdecs cossedgncacsesssaseoecducaacdeve sd ecetee dees secuvebceddecaesbenevsnetbeues 126 SN ZO O OR NT 128 Corrections Based on IC oomococococonococonononononononononononanonocononanonononanononacananacacanananananaso L O Creating Manual Station Labels omosmossssssssss LIL Creating Ticket Layouts Scripts scsiscceccsisscecsassecctovceccesdetescccsncnctexececevasseensaeeonessneceny 132 THE TICKET LA
144. ch ticket that complies with Mn DOT Specification 2461 4D7a dated September 7 2001 CALIFORNIA TYPE EVALUATION PROGRAM CTEP APPROVAL Certificate Number 5534 07 This device was evaluated under the California Type Evaluation Program CTEP and was found to comply with the applicable technical requirements of California Code of Regulations for Weighing and Measuring Devices 02 09 10 10 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 REVISIONS September 22 2000 e Updated section on Exporting Batch Weights to include the option of exporting load level weights e Restructured Ticket Printing information e Added more details about batch weights on reports and tickets e Added section on Mixer Operation June 20 2001 Added information about using math calculations in the Data column of the Ticket Layout Editor see The Ticket Layout Editor Screen August 21 2001 Added sub section about Ulink Admix Modifiers to the Admix Designs section August 28 2001 Added example of Truck Production Report September 7 2001 e Added section on Slump Tables and slump calculations e Updated list of new features for V6 18 September 11 2001 Added sections on Batching Defaults and System Defaults screens September 20 2001 Added section on Device Property Sets October 9 2001 Updated description of Batch Weight options and moved this information from the Reports section t
145. ck Code e Notes e Ordered Amount NOTE You cannot change the Mix Code or Delivered Amount Editing from the Order Entry Screen 1 Select MAIN MENU DATA ENTRY ORDERS or press F6 from the ORDER INDEX Either way the ORDER ENTRY screen appears with the cursor on the Order Code field NEW Order should appear at the top left corner of the screen and the current date and day should appear on the next line 2 To edit one of today s orders type or browse for the appropriate Order Code and press ENTER The Order Code appears on the screen along with other information for the order To edit an order for a day other than today move the cursor over the current date and type or browse for the appropriate date Press ENTER The cursor moves to the Order Code field Type or browse for the appropriate Order Code and press ENTER The Order Code appears on the screen along with other information for the order 3 Move the cursor to the appropriate field and type the new information When you start typing the old information disappears Press ENTER to move to the next field Press ENTER to move past fields until you get to the one you want 4 When you are finished editing press F1 to save your changes To Change Order Times Default times travel waiting unloading washing out and returning are assigned to each order These times are used to calculate the batch time of the next load These times can also be print
146. complete the system automatically reboots 02 09 10 285 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 BATCH WEIGHTS BACKUP amp RESTORE Note Before you back up to or restore from a USB removable device make sure the device has been set up formatted and connected as described in the document Data Transfer From To a USB Device Batch weights should be backed up at least once every 30 days Normally this is done daily when the End of Day process is run However you can do this without running an End of Day process This is accomplished from the screen shown below Notice that a message at the top of the screen shows the load ID and date range for batch weights not yet backed up NOTE The number of days the system keeps batch weights is specified on the SYSTEM DEFAULTS screen If you have not backed up batch weights 10 days after this default deadline the system automatically backs them up Batch Weights Backup amp Restore Operation Drive Number of days to keep old records To BACKUP BATCH WEIGHTS 1 Select MAIN MENU SYSTEM MAINTENANCE DISK UTILITIES BATCH WEIGHTS BACKUP amp RESTORE The above screen appears 2 The cursor is on the Operation field with Backup as the default entry Press ENTER to accept Backup and move the cursor to the Drive field 3 Select the desired backup media in the Drive field and press ENTER First is the default 02 09 10 286 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6
147. ctrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 ADMIXTURE BOTTLES Now that you have set up metered liquids you can set up the bottles they will feed into This is done on the ADMIXTURE BOTTLES screen shown next Fields on this screen are described in the table after that As with many Spectrum screens you can go directly to other related screens from this one For instance you can press F4 to go to the I O Assignments screen F5 to go to the Metered Liquids screen or F6 to go to the Feed Destinations screen Admixture Bottles Screen Capacity Unit Hold Discharge Keyboard Hold 4 Bottle Empty Allow Early Feed Bottle Full Display Group 4 Blowout Time Seconds Discharge Start Delay Seconds FIELDS FIELD DESCRIPTION j Code Browseable list of admixture bottles Name Description of the admixture bottle Capacity Unit Maximum capacity of the bottle in the unit selected Keyboard Hold Browseable list of function keys The one selected can be used on the Graph screen to hold this device from discharging Allow Early Feed Yes No field enables disables freewheeling for this admixture bottle Display Group Browseable list of group color numbers in which to display this device on the Graph screen These color numbers correspond to the colors selected for the Graph screen on the Batching Defaults screen 02 09 10 96 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 Blowout Time DESCRIPTION Le
148. culations Quality control personnel normally provide this number Small Batch Percentage of the scale meter capacity below which small Tolerances batch tolerances are used If this value is zero large normal batch tolerances are used Over Tolerance Allowable percentage or amount of over tolerance based on the entry units for the plant When calculating over tolerance situations the system uses the smaller of the percentage or the amount Note For large normal tolerance checking the system uses the larger of the percentage or amount entries Under Tolerance FUNCTION KEYS uses the larger of the percentage or amount entries Allowable percentage or amount of under tolerance based on the entry units for the plant When calculating under tolerance situations the system uses the smaller of the percentage or the amount Note For large normal tolerance checking the system FUNCTION KEY F1 Save To save data you have entered or changed F2 Browse To pull up a list of possible entries Browseable fields have these brackets F3 Page 2 To go to the second page of this screen F6 MatCalc To pull up a screen showing setups for all ingredients in the database You cannot make any changes on this screen F7 Clear To cancel changes before you have saved them F8 Delete To delete the Ingredient record currently displayed When
149. d the slurry water ingredient is entered as an absolute amount in the mix design This means there is no based on entry in the mix design If more than one type of water is used i e fresh water hot water and slurry water the system will still perform moisture and admix water corrections against the main water For the Mix Slurry Target Specific Gravity method the specific gravities of the slurry water slurry solids and fresh water are used in calculations to meet the slurry target specific gravity as entered in the mix SETUPS e For the Percentage and Mix Slurry Target Specific Gravity methods to be enabled and correction to occur the slurry water ingredient must have the following entries on the Ingredients screen sg in the Based On field A value in the Specific Gravity of Slurry Solids field The slurry ingredient needs to be part of the 3 WAT and 3 SLURRY groups e For the Absolute method the slurry water ingredient is entered as an absolute amount in the mix design This means there is no based on entry in the mix design e The solids portion of the Slurry can be used to adjust an aggregate or cement material This can be done with any of the slurry calculation methods mentioned above e The aggregate material to be adjusted for slurry solids needs to be part of the 1 FINES group The value in the Factor field of the Material Calculations screen is used as the percentag
150. d Surface Dry weight SSD moisture can range from to 3 above Oven Dry Correction Weighting Applies to groups of ingredients Example Hot and cold water are both used in a mix design However correction needs to be made to water amounts due to the moisture in the sand If both the hot and cold water ingredients have a correction weighting value of zero the system adjusts each amount proportionately based on their target weights in the mix design However if you assign a value of 1 to cold water and a value of zero to hot water then the system makes the adjustments against the cold water This is because the cold water is 100 percent of the total weighting of the two water group ingredients i e 1 0 1 and the value of cold water is 1 which is 100 percent of the total The numbers themselves don t carry any meaning except the ratio of the total of the entire ingredient group that they represent If you want the correction to the water to be applied 50 50 percent between hot and cold water then you could assign a value of 1 to both ingredients Because they are both 50 percent of the 2 the adjustments would be applied at 50 percent per ingredient This can work for more than two ingredients Everything is still based on proportionate ratio Note If the system is applying an adjustment to an ingredient and that ingredient target goes below zero before the total adjustment is applied the system applies the adjustment proportiona
151. d ingredient and press ENTER to insert the ingredient into this field 6 Press ENTER to move to the Absolute field If the ingredient is an Absolute Value ingredient e g an aggregate type the absolute value per cubic yard or meter in this field and press ENTER to enter the next ingredient If the ingredient is a Based On ingredient leave the Absolute field blank and press ENTER to move to the Based On field 7 In the Based On field type the numeric value you wish to associate with this Based On ingredient Press ENTER The cursor moves to the next ingredient line NOTES For Based On ingredients either or e is displayed in this field for percentage based e for hundred weight based This field is not accessible for Absolute Value ingredients The cursor moves to the next ingredient line instead 8 Continue adding ingredients in the order you want them batched The Yield field displays a number for each ingredient added This number is derived from the Specific Gravity field of the INGREDIENTS screen multiplied by the amount of the ingredient in the mix design When you have added all ingredients to the mix design the Total Yield field value should be approximately 27 See your QC person for more information about yields 9 Complete the fields on the right side of the screen see the previous table for definitions of these fields Press F1 to save the new mix design record
152. data on the bottom portion of the screen you must set this field to Y yes Must also be set to Y if you use ingredients as resale products Decimal Points Number of decimal places to show in the inventory amounts at the bottom of the screen Deduct from Ingredient Used only when an ingredient is used as a resale product Must be set to Y in this case Internal Unit Sale Unit Default unit of measure for the product Unit of measure in which the product is sold Sale Internal Unit Factor Conversion factor for converting the Sale Unit to the Internal Unit Inventory Unit Unit of measure in which inventory for the product is to be displayed 02 09 10 58 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 DESCRIPTION Inventory Internal Unit Factor Conversion factor for converting the Inventory Unit to the Internal Unit Expressed as a weight volume Purchase Unit Unit of measure in which the product is to be received Purchase Inventory Unit Factor Conversion factor for converting the Purchase Unit to the Inventory Unit Expressed as a weight volume On Hand and sale unit information is displayed Inventory Periods There are four inventory periods displayed 1 Day 2 Week 3 Month and 4 Year Total inventory and sale Current on hand balance of the product Both the inventory units are displayed for each inventory pe
153. de The Target field is a display area for 4 different fields Target is displayed by default You can display 3 other fields Each time you press F8 one of these fields is displayed in place of the previous one The other 3 fields are e Togo Percentage of target yet to feed e Togo Amount in lbs left to feed e Mboist Current moisture of ingredients with an active moisture probe F9 RUN Causes the batch currently displayed on the BATCH SETUP screen to start weighing up NOTE Although this function can be accessed from any screen in the Spectrum System it is highly recommended that you run batches from the BATCH SETUP screen only This way you can see that you are batching the correct order F10 HOLD Causes the batch currently running to hold or suspend This function can be accessed from any screen in the Spectrum System 02 09 10 210 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 Function Key F11 Causes the load currently weighing up to discharge This DISCHARGE function can be accessed from any screen in the Spectrum System See Starting Discharge F12 GRAPH When pressed from any screen this key displays the GRAPH screen Pressing this key from the GRAPH screen takes you back to the previous screen When a batch is finished you can quickly return to the BATCH SETUP screen by pressing this key re STARTING DISCHARGE Discharge is initiated
154. de Allow reordering of loads on Sequence Code EA O dex screen Load S 3 Load will Call Ticketed Discharging Normal Run Mixing Held Started Done weighing Late To add a new user account 1 Select Main Menu gt System Maintenance gt Users The User Setup screen shown above appears Enter a User Code This code can be no longer than 10 letters Tab down to the Name field and enter the first and last name of the new user Tab down and enter a Password up to 6 characters in length at eS Fill in the rest of the USER SETUP screen using the field descriptions table on the following pages as a guide 6 Press lt F1 gt to save the new user data and password 02 09 10 165 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 FIELDS USER SETUP SCREEN FIELD DESCRIPTION User Code Browseable field 10 letter code name for the user Name First and last name of the user Password User s password Up to 6 characters To change an existing user s password select the user code type the new password here then press F1 to save the new password Plant Name Browseable field 2 character name for the default plant of the user This field is used by the Plants screen to determine where reports should be printed Display Orders Determines when orders appear on the Dispatch screen Default Lead Time 1s 180 minutes which means the order appears on the Dispatch screen 3 hours before the order s first truck
155. de Ver 6 24 EXPORT TICKETS TO DOS FILE Note Before you export to USB removable device make sure the device has been set up formatted and connected as described in the document Data Transfer From To a USB Device This utility lets you transfer ticket information to a DOS or Windows accounting program or to a QNX formatted floppy disk or USB removable device Export Tickets Drive Start Date End Date Ticket File Script File Name Directory Full Path and File Name To EXPORT TICKET DATA 1 Select MAIN MENU SYSTEM MAINTENANCE DISK UTILITIES EXPORT TICKETS TO DOS FILE 2 The Drive field is selected with A as the default entry Possible entries from the browse list are First DOS Floppy Second DOS Floppy First DOS Hard Disk Second DOS Hard Disk QNX Directory Winlink Directory USB Removable Device ZOO gt Select the appropriate drive and press ENTER The cursor moves to the Start Date field 3 Select the Start Date The default is today s date You can browse for dates with tickets Press ENTER The cursor moves to the End Date field 02 09 10 288 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 4 02 09 10 Select the End Date The default is today s date You can browse for dates with tickets Press ENTER The cursor moves to the Ticket File Script field Enter the ticket file script file where ticket data is stored in Spectrum The default is ticket_file x Pres
156. ded that you run batches from the BATCH SETUP screen only You can start batches from other Spectrum screens if this option is activated per user but you cannot see which order is currently active ESCAPE KEY PROMPT This prompt appears at the bottom left of every screen It is used to exit the screen If you keep pressing ESCAPE you will end up back at the MAIN MENU FUNCTION KEY PROMPTS SCREEN SPECIFIC These prompts for Function keys F1 F8 appear along the bottom of every screen They are different from screen to screen For example on Data Entry screens F1 is used to save data while on the Load Index screen it is used to access the BATCH SETUP screen F2 is typically used to access field help 02 09 10 28 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 THE SPECTRUM DATABASE WHAT IS THE DATABASE As stated earlier in this guide a database is a group of electronically stored information that can be retrieved and used so that the same information does not have to be re typed every time it is needed The Spectrum System contains a single database for your company How I S THE DATABASE ORGANIZED Each screen listed on the DATA ENTRY menu represents a database table that contains a particular kind of information The Customers database table for example contains information about customers only Each database table is further subdivided into records A Customer record for example contains information about
157. design There are pre defined material Groups Cement 2 CEM Aggregate 1 AGG Admixture 4 ADX Water 3 WAT Water Admix 5 WATADX and ALL There are also three user defined Group codes allowed which are defined by being entered in the Group Code Auxiliary Group or Aux2 Group fields on the INGREDIENTS screen Some calculations use only the ingredient quantities and the material calculation factor recorded on the Material Calculations screen Other calculations use factors from the Ingredients screen The final target batch weights may or may not have the same units as the ingredients in the mix For instance conversions between weight and volume units e g lb to gal use the Weight to Volume Factor from the Ingredients screen Because material calculations are based on Groups and not on individual materials there are some restrictions For example an Admixture cannot be based on one Cement and not on another since by definition all Cements are in the same Group The amount of the based on Admixture is therefore dependent upon the total amount of ALL Cements There is a way to base an Admixture on one Cement Assign the Cementitious ingredient to its own user defined Group Then base the Admixture on this user defined Group CAUTION This reorganization of Cement ingredients may alter the functioning of other material calculations such as Cements being based on and correcting themselves To solve this problem
158. e Order Code Time Two part field The first part is the system generated order code The second part is the time the first load of the order is to arrive on the job Job Name Job name associated with the order If a project is not associated with the order the name of the customer is displayed in this field Order Status e N Normal firm e C Cancelled cancels all totals e E Ended keeps delivered totals e H Held Browseable field of order statuses Valid entries are e W Will Call Truck Code Truck code assigned to the order When this field contains a truck code the information is carried over to the BATCH SETUP screen This information can be changed at any time Notes Any notes entered on the order Mix Code Mix code entered on the order Cannot be changed here Ordered Amount Total yards ordered for the order You may add a after the number to designate that a finish load is needed Delivered Amount batched for the order Firm Will Call System generated total of Firm Will Call yards ordered for the order date Orders with a status of N or H are considered firm orders Firm Orders System generated total of yards delivered for the day This number is updated by the system each time a load is Orders with a status of N or H are considered firm orders 176 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 mw FUNCTION KEYS ORDER I NDEX
159. e to adjust the aggregate material in the slurry solids calculation 02 09 10 128 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 e The cement material to be adjusted for slurry solids needs to be part of the 2 FINES group The value in the Factor field of the Material Calculations screen is used as the percentage to adjust the cement material in the slurry solids calculation e You should add a row to the Material Calculations screen with U as the Type 3 SLURRY as Group 1 and 2 FINES as Group 2 e Since all corrections to water should be done to the fresh water the row for 3 WAT with a X as the Type should be moved up on the Material Calculations screen e The Correction Weighting factor for water should be set to 1 00 on the Ingredients screen A typical setup for slurry calculations on the Material Calculations screen is shown next Recalculate Position Group 1 Group 2 Type Factor Targets Trace Comment 1 2CEM 2 CEM X 0 000 N N 2 2 CEM 4 ADX B 0 000 N N 3 4 ADX 4 ADX E 0 000 N N 4 2 CEM F 0 000 N N 5 2 CEM R 1 000 N N 6 ALL T 0 000 N N 7 ALL A 0 000 N N 8 3 WAT 3 WAT X 0 000 N N 9 4ADX 3 WAT 1 000 N N 10 SWATADX 3 WAT S 1 000 N N 11 SWATADX 1 AGG S 0 000 N N 12 1 AGG 3 WAT M 0 000 Y N 13 3 SLURRY Y 0 000 N N 14 3 SLURRY 1 FINES U 1 000 N N 15 ALL L
160. e if a driver was assigned to the truck 7 Enter a driver name or edit the one that appears 8 Make sure Y is selected in the Verified column for the selected ticket An example of the completed Assign Truck Code box is shown next Assign Truck Code Box completed 9 Press F1 to save the information The ticket will then print or finish printing and will show the new or revised truck information Caution If you forget to verify the truck code the ticket will not print You will have to go to the Edit Ticket screen to edit the truck information before the ticket will print See Editing the Truck Code After Discharge for more information gt EDITING THE TRUCK CODE AFTER DISCHARGE Use this method to edit the truck code and print the ticket if you did not do so when prompted to verify the truck code Note You will only be prompted to verify the truck code if there is either a T or F flag in the Ticket Script Name s field of the Printer Setup screen Caution If you do not verify the truck code as prompted by the warning message the ticket will not print 02 09 10 203 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 To edit verify the truck code from the Edit Ticket screen 1 Goto DATA ENTRY EDIT TICKETS 2 Press F2 to pull up a list of ticket dates Arrow down to the appropriate date and press ENTER The cursor moves to the Ticket ID field 4 Press F2 to pull up the Tickets Browse window a
161. e Ver 6 24 RESALE PRODUCT I NVENTORY Select Time Period 1 for Day 2 for Week 3 for Month or 4 for Year Example below shows Today s Totals March 23 2000 RESALE PRODUCT INVENTORY REPORT TODAY S TOTALS 01 USER ALKON SHIPPED TODAY 557 TOTAL SHIPPED See PRODUCT ON HAND QUANTITY QUANTITY 524 288 4 505 84 5 510 308 512 125 516 156 513 0 0 553 Oz 0 0 554 oz 6 000 0 555 bag 62 0 SANDRESALE lb SAND TCG 0 0 0 0 denotes that the on hand amount for the product is tracked in the ingredient displayed 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 8 0 OO OOO 000 0 D 505010 0 000 en p END OF REPORT 02 09 10 248 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 AVERAGE MOISTURE REPORT When you run the report from the Reports Menu select a Date and Time Range The End of Day and End of Week processes automatically run the report for the current day and week respectively The example below shows totals for two days 02 16 2004 through 02 18 2004 Tuesday April 18 2000 10 58 wee AVERAGE MOISTURE REPORT FROM 02 16 2004 08 00 To O2 17 2004 18 00 MATERIAL BATCHED FREE 55D TOTAL TOTAL WATER MOIST WATER MOIST 1 CR GR 149300 1b 370 1b O 25 370 lb 0 25 SAND 264190 Tb 12580 Tb 5 00 12580 Tb 5 00 wee END OF REPORT 02 09 10 249 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 I NGREDI ENT LISTING Thursday March 23 2000 INGREDIENT LISTING BLEND C CEMEN
162. e in minutes for trucks at this plant Washdown Time Default washdown time in minutes for trucks at this plant 02 09 10 155 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 Startup Time DESCRIPTION Default startup time in minutes for this plant Startup time includes morning tasks needed to get the plant ready for batching starting equipment computers etc Cleanout Time Default cleanout time in minutes for this plant Cleanout time includes tasks needed to get plant equipment ready for shutdown cleaning chutes and mixers turning off the power etc Batching Node Node number of the PC that controls batching for this plant Remote Plant Select one of the following Y for Yes if there is a remote batching PC N for No if there is no remote batching PC V for Virtual if you want to use two different ticket formats for the same plant Calculate Targets for Remote Plant Yes No field that indicates whether the Mini Dispatch will calculate net material targets for tickets not batched at plants using Version 6 Spectrum Weighmaster through Weighmaster name and employer information Zip Code fields Batch on Receipt Batch on Receipt type used Choices are N Not Enabled Y Enabled L Link Tickets Only D Demands d Demands Debug Destination Name Determines where the following information is sent or printed These are browseable lists of
163. e Export Batch Weights to QC Helper e Format Disk e Import Data Files Disk Utilities Menu Batching Defaults Floppy Removable Media Backup amp Restore Hard Disk Backup amp Restore Batch Weights Backup amp Restore Export Tickets to DOS File Export Batch Weights to QC Helper Purge amp Rebuild Database Rebuild Individual Database Index Repair Corrupt Database File Format Disk Floppy Disk Copy Import Data Files Winlink File Transfer Convert Database Files From 6 04 Convert Ticket Files From 6 04 Convert Database Files From 6 05 Update Spectrum Purge Batchbook Mixes 02 09 10 279 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 FLOPPY REMOVABLE MEDIA BACKUP amp RESTORE This option lets you back up the Spectrum database to a floppy disk or USB removable device It also lets you restore the database from a floppy disk or USB removable device In addition you can format a floppy disk or USB removable device Note Before you back up to USB removable device make sure the device has been set up formatted and connected as described in the document Data Transfer From To a USB Device The operations mentioned above are performed from the following screen which appears when you select MAIN MENU SYSTEM MAINTENANCE DISK UTILITIES FLOPPY REMOVABLE MEDIA BACKUP amp RESTORE Backup amp Restore Floppy Removable Disk Operation Drive Directory Files Backups To FLOPPY Disk OR USB REMOVABLE D
164. e Round By Factor 10 Max Batch Size 5 m3 This load would be split into two batches of 3 1 m3 each Example 2 Load Size NOT evenly divisible by Round By Factor Load Size 6 15 m3 Batch Size Round By Factor 10 Max Batch Size 5 m3 This load would be split into two batches The first batch would be 3 1 m3 and the second and last batch would be 3 05 m3 02 09 10 118 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 SYSTEM DEFAULTS On this screen 2 pages shown below you can do things like assign labels to user defined fields set default truck trip times and set how many days to keep batch weight ticket and other records System Defaults Screen Page 1 01 SYSTEM DEFAULTS Auto Add Dates 4 1 User Defined Default Units Fields tC HARG Summer 2 SECT Winter 10 1 Sl Format MM DD Test Mix Washout Mix Transient Records Keep Batch Weights Keep Ticket Load Information Keep Batch Information Keep Drop Records 10 Keep Incoming Records 10 Returned Concrete Flags Auto Fill Override Enabled 30 10 0 Language Configuration Language English Currency US_Dollar Date MMDDYY QuickTicket to Load Index Allow Link Mix Conversion Batchbook Format MET ASA Clear System Defaults Screen Page 2 01 SYSTEM DEFAULTS Default Truck Trip Times Traveling Time Waiting Time Unloading Time Unloading Time Per Unit Washing Out Time Returning Time Minutes 10
165. e Start FIELDS FIELD D RIPTIO Code Browseable list of holding tanks Name Description of the holding tank Capacity Unit Maximum capacity of the holding tank in the unit selected Keyboard Hold Browseable list of function keys The one selected can be used on the Graph screen to hold this device from discharging Allow Early Feed Yes No field enables disables freewheeling for this holding tank Discharge Time Length of time in seconds the valve on the hose must stay open after the holding tank is empty to allow all fluid to drain from the hose 02 09 10 98 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 D D RIPTIO Start Delay Length of time in seconds the system waits before starting discharge from the holding tank Hold Discharge Browseable list of I O points for the tank hold limit switch Automatically shuts the valve if a problem is detected by the system Tank Empty Browseable list of I O points for the Tank Empty input Tank Full Browseable list of I O points for the Tank Full input Discharge Browseable list of I O points for the tank discharge output Hold Source Feeds Browseable list of I O points for the hold source feeds output Initial Charge Done Browseable list of I O points for the initial charge done output Final Charge Start Browseable list of I O points for the final charge start output 02 09 10 99 Spectrum User s Guide
166. e ait ae dada ADVANCED BATCHING HEA TURES uta Multi Batching coccion rra re Continuous Run w A O NANO OMC A Rte lee A e o a Os me To Create Load Information Using Quick Load me To edit QuickL02d informations idad 225 e Tobatch a Quick oad Data e AAA dis TE E A O IN SS JE TA A O A ther Bel hatha a aa Rte AA AE Soe ie aes Sa TA EU ere tesa A E OR e EN ee eter EOI Fields PUNCH ON Key Si in Ia a KETAT old G Matera Overview ee ad 114311 F me 111 F F Ll mr ERKKKEE mu mu Function Ka ARES To Reassign Ingredients La To Activate Deactivate d DEVICE ce roren sete cadets ei Ses sossadessonesdbsvedaibuntendesee Ees To Change Feed and Discharge Parameters E TUE Was 1611 POR ee A ee 232 Mixer Operation For Plants with Mixers ssccssssccssssssssssssssscssssscssssssssesssssses LOD OVER VIEW siii tad IMTXERS SGREENes 2 gust Gecvt s62 e e meade antes eee RS ICID Sete shy RARE Reports cucsicriandican ciar dioniicia PRINTING REPORTS al acc CANCELING PRINTING OF ALL REPORTS DISPLAY BATCH WEIGHTS REPORT s cccccccecsesssaececececsenseaececececsenssecesececeeseaseeceecceeseaaeceeceeesessaaseeeecs 114311 02 09 10 7 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 BATCH WEIGHTS REPORT BY DATE sccesssscecssssecesssnsecesseseecssseeceesnsecsecsssesssnsececesnsecsensssecsssesessusnsesess 241 BATCH WEIGHTS REPORT BY LOAD neirinnen rinore eier iiae ee Esr e E rE EaR K r eee
167. e and Format fields and moves the cursor to the Action field for the next data field Notice that the field length is automatically entered in the Format field Repeat Steps 10 11 and 12 above for all product information you want printed on the ticket Enter NL when you want the data to be printed on a new line of the ticket When you have entered all product information enter RESALE on the next available Action line Press F1 to save the ticket script The system assigns a y extension to the script name 140 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 02 09 10 Product Information on Ticket Script Ttttttttt VOTO ROO RARO ROO RR TTT TTT TTT TTT ttt ttt ttt ttt PRINT 72 NL NESALE PRINT PRINT PRINT PRINT PRINT PRINT IF PRINT IF PRINT RESALE JUMP IF 0 LLLLLLLLL See eee ee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee 141 tt 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 y Tttttt 6 2 Y LLLLLL Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 SPECI FYING WHICH TICKET SCRIPT TO USE 1 Select MAIN MENU gt SYSTEM MAINTENANCE PRINTER SETUP 2 Verify that the Node for which you wish to assign a ticket script is selected If not change the node field to reflect the desired node Select the Ticket Script Name s field 4 Type the name of the ticket name you wish to print in this field The ticket name must be preceded by a t and ended with a y 5 Press F1 to save your entry EDITING AN EXI STING TICKE
168. e completion of feeding of one ingredient could trigger the start of feeding of another ingredient Only qualified personnel should create or edit sequences For these reasons this Guide does not discuss how to create sequences If you have any questions about sequencing please contact your Quality Control representative or call the Command Alkon Service Department 02 09 10 172 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 DISCHARGE CYCLE After all ingredients with holding facilities scales bottles or holding hoppers have been weighed up they can be discharged into a truck or mixer There are two kinds of discharge 1 Choke Feeding and 2 Inching Discharge With Choke Feeding the gates are held fully open until the scales are empty Choke Feeding is used when the truck or mixer can handle very fast discharge rates With Inching Discharge the gates are pulsed open and closed to create a smooth flow of material from the scales Inching Discharge helps to avoid overflowing the truck or mixer Assuming there are no problems initial water is fed then the remaining materials are discharged in the order established in the sequence set for this mix design Several discharge and system parameters control the discharge rate Discharge continues until there is a certain amount of material left in each scale At this point the gates open fully and the vibrators come on to clear hung up material When each scale reaches its zero point Scale
169. e layout of most screens is similar For example function key prompts for batching are always displayed at the top right comer The example below shows items common to most screens Each item is explained in more detail on the following page Function Key Prompts Current Time Screen Title F9 F12 Always the Same AAA Q Ron somo prscx craps Account Number Customer Code Customer Name Account Status Credit Limit User Defined Account Balance Tax Zone Returned Concrete Allowed 05D 2 Print Prices Address Address P O Box City State County Zip Postal Code Contact Name Phone Number Note es Clear Delete a ESCAPE Key Prompt Function Key Prompts F1 F8 Screen Specific 02 09 10 27 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 CURRENT TIME The current time as set in the Spectrum system is displayed in the top left corner SCREEN TITLE A screen title appears at the top center of every screen except the GRAPH screen FUNCTION KEY PROMPTS FOR BATCHING These prompts appear at the top right of every screen so you can control the batch in progress while working on other screens They are always F9 for Run F10 for Hold F11 for Discharge and F12 to pull up the GRAPH screen or to return to the previous screen IMPORTANT Itis highly recommen
170. e mixer is empty NOTE This assumes the operator has manually tilted and righted the mixer once When the mixer is empty and running the name of the mixer i e MIXER appears at the top of the Spectrum screen Spectrum can now load the mixer As this happens the name of the mixer at the top of the screen is replaced by the LOADING status message When loading is complete the LOADING message is replaced by the MIXING TIME message Remaining mix time is displayed just to the right of this status message Note The system uses the Mixer Time as set in the mix design If no mix time was entered in the mix design the system uses the Mixing Time value from the Mixers screen When Mixing Time expires and the necessary interlocks are met shroud diverter etc the MIXING TIME status message is replaced by OPENING then OPENED then DISCHARGING Assuming the mixer is set for Automatic operation discharge occurs as controlled by the Partial Open Time Partial Open Pause Full Open Time and Discharge Time Once Discharge Time expires the status message changes to CLOSING as the mixer moves from the fully open to the fully closed position The mixer is now ready for another batch Note If the load size exceeds the mixer s capacity the mixer multi batches the load 02 09 10 233 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 MIXERS SCREEN On this screen you can enter parameters and the operating mode for mixers Up to three mixers can
171. ecified motion range for three consecutive samples taken every one tenth of a second the scale is considered stable and the system records the scale s value If three consecutive no motion 02 09 10 89 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 samples are not read during a 1 5 second motion sampling period the system issues the In Motion error message as shown in the following screen example RUN 0 0 0 0 BOTTLEO2 BOTTLEO BOTTLEO4 Screen print finished Operator choices are e Press lt F4 gt to accept the error The accepted motion error Start Tare End Tare or Batch Weight will then be marked with an m beside the weight on the ticket Note Other tolerance check errors take precedence over motion checking and may overwrite the in motion flag e Press lt F6 gt to re read the scale and perform the motion check again 02 09 10 90 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 FLOW CONTROL DAMPENING This feature allows scale flow rates to be dampened to allow more precise feed cutoff calculations and drop determinations re SETUP For each scale that uses Flow Control 5 From the Main Menu select Plant Setup gt Scales The Scales screen appears Scales Screen Code Name Hold Disch Grad Unit 20 00 Keyboard Hold Gate Closed Capacity 50000 00 Display Group Allow Early Feed Display Order Gate Open Flow Control Enabled Gate Close Maximum Flow Rate Vibrator Minimum Flow Rate G
172. ective for V6 23B 08 and later September 23 2008 Added the section Making a Local Ticket a Dispatch Ticket November 10 2008 Updated this manual for V6 24A April 28 2009 Added new User Setup screen example showing the Enforce Based On Check field along with a description of this new field July 6 2009 Updated the list of Calculation Types used on the Material Calculations Screen to include the I and J types that deal with excluding returned concrete amounts from load size calculations Also added a text description of each calculation type Feb 9 2010 Added description of Auto HH MM SS and Manual HH MM SS to Common Items on Batch Weight Reports section 02 09 10 12 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 USER S GUIDE TERMINOLOGY The following conventions are used throughout this Guide to bring attention to fields screens menus keystroke commands and features MENU SCREEN AND DATABASE NAMES When a particular Spectrum menu screen or database table is discussed in the text its name appears in the following style CUSTOMERS screen MENU AND SCREEN LOCATIONS Screen locations within the Spectrum system are indicated as follows MAIN MENU DATA ENTRY CUSTOMERS For example to access the CUSTOMERS screen indicated above start at the MAIN MENU select Data Entry then select Customers from the DATA ENTRY menu Y FIELD N
173. ed cancels all totals e E Ended keeps delivered totals e H Held W Will Call No Of Loads Number of loads delivered for the order This system ed For EN 206 users this field can contain a string of information about Strength Class Exposure Class Flow Class Maximum Aggregate Size and Cement Type For non EN 206 users this field can be blank or used for entering additional information This information defaults in from the mix design and onto tickets for the order generated field should not be chang Job Job name filled in automatically if a project is associated with the order Plant Plant from which the concrete will be shipped Addr Four address lines for delivery information Filled in automatically if a project is associated with the order P O If a P O is required it is entered here This field flashes if a P O is required set in the Customer record 02 09 10 181 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 DESCRIPTION UDF 1 User defined field may contain up to 20 characters The label is also user defined UDF 2 User defined field may contain up to 20 characters The label is also user defined UDF 3 User defined field may contain up to 20 characters The label is also user defined Tax Zone Tax zone assigned to the customer in the customer file You may change this information C O D Indicates whether the order is a credit or ca
174. ed Amt and Mix 8 Customer Name 9 Dispatch Ticket Number Show Loads on Browseable field Sets which plant s loads will be displayed on Load Index by Plant the Load Index for this user Show Batch Loads Yes No field that sets whether batched loads are displayed on on Load Index the Load Index for this user Enforce Based On e If this field is set to Yes and an ingredient has been assigned Check a Based On unit users can only edit the ingredient s Based On amount on the Mix Designs screen e If this field is set to No the system operates as normal and allows the user to enter either an Absolute or a Based On value not both Dispatch Order Browseable fields Sets the color in which orders are displayed Colors depending on their statuses There are 15 colors to choose from Load Index Load Browseable fields Sets the colors in which loads will be Colors displayed on the Load Index depending on their statuses There are 15 colors to choose from 02 09 10 167 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 USER SECURITY The USER SECURITY SETUP screen is used to prohibit access to certain parts of the system For example you can limit an Order Entry user s access to the Customers Sales Tax Rates Resale Products Projects Orders and Tickets screens Select Main Menu gt System Maintenance gt Users then press lt F4 gt to access the USER SECURITY SETUP screen Spectrum comes with three pre de
175. ed as the admix code along with their corresponding Ulink fields and descriptions See the section titled To Create an Admix Design for more information Spectrum Ulink Field Description Type Max Format Replace Admix Name or Modify ULINK_092 092 Calcium Num 4 N NN Replace ULINK_093 093 Air Num 3 NNN Apply as Entrainment percent to modify ULINK_094 094 Super Num 3 NNN Apply as Plasticizer percent to modify ULINK_095 095 Hot Water Num 3 NNN Apply as percent to modify ULINK_096 096 Pounds of Ice Num 4 NNNN Replace Note In Spectrum you do not have to put a calcium ingredient in ULINK_092 nor an air entrainment ingredient in ULINK_093 etc A Ulink style admix design contains all of the materials that can be modified When a value is sent in the corresponding Ulink field the amounts associated with the material names in the admix design that match materials in the main mix are either modified multiplied as a percentage or replaced by the value in the Ulink field Example The dispatching computer sends a ticket with a value in Ulink field 092 Ulink looks for a Spectrum admix design named ULINK_092 If the admix design is found and it contains one or more of the materials used in the main mix the value sent in Ulink field 092 replaces the amounts of these materials in the main mix 02 09 10 56 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 RESALE PRODUCTS Resale products
176. ed on customer delivery tickets To change order times 1 Select MAIN MENU gt DATA ENTRY ORDERS 2 Type or browse for the Order Code Press ENTER The Order Entry screen appears 3 Press F3 Times The Order Times box appears as shown below 02 09 10 185 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 Order Times Box Travel Time Waiting Time Unloading Time Washing Out Time Returning Time 4 To change a time type over the existing time 5 Press ESC to exit the Order Times box then be sure to press F1 to save your changes to the order To Change Order Pricing For an order associated with a project pricing is usually driven by the project For an order not associated with a project you can change pricing as explained below Pricing can be changed while the order is being created or after the order is saved 1 Ly Select MAIN MENU DATA ENTRY ORDERS Type or browse for the Order Code Press ENTER The order appears on the screen with the mix design and any resale products displayed at the 3 Highlight the product that requires a pricing adjustment Press F5 Discount to pull up the Discount Pricing box shown next Discount Pricing Box Product Code Quantity Discount is Unit Price Extended Price List Price F600 OG Discount t30 Bf Net Price Item Tax Total Product Taxable 4 Order Tax Code 5507 Tax Rate 5 To apply a Discount type either the dollars per unit o
177. edient feeds Also for each ingredient a colored bar moves from left to right across the screen to show the progress of feeding Target Percentage of the target fed so far for each ingredient Increases as the ingredient feeds This field is actually a display area for 4 different fields Target is the default field Press F8 to cause another field to be displayed See the description for the F8 function key for more information Scale Name of each scale or measurement device Weight Weight of the materials in each scale Bottle Name of each bottle assigned to a measurement device 02 09 10 209 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 wm FUNCTION KEYS GRAPH SCREEN Function Key F1 FIAGG Purpose Press this key to hold the AGG scale Press this key again to release the scale This is a user defined field F2 FFCEM Press this key to hold the CEM scale Press this key again to release the scale This is a user defined field F3 F3WAT Press this key to hold the WAT measurement device Press this key again to release this device This is a user defined field F4 F4ADX Press this key again to release this device This is a user Press this key to hold the ADX measurement device defined field F7 Abort Press this key to abort the batch You will be asked to press this key again to confirm Once a batch is aborted it cannot be restarted F8 Mo
178. een and this value will be used whenever the mix is used in a batch e On the Batch Setup screen you can adjust the default slump of a mix at batch time e On the Batching Defaults screen you can enter a plant wide default slump value to be automatically entered whenever you create a mix design e You can use slump tables to vary how much water is added or subtracted for each increment of change specified in the slump table Standard Slump Calculations Standard slump calculations use a linear method of adjusting slump For each inch or 25 mm that you add to or subtract from the slump value the system adds or subtracts one gallon or 5 L of water per cubic yard or meter of concrete Whether you adjust the slump one inch 25 mm or three inches 75mm one gallon 5 L is still added or subtracted for each inch 25 mm of change Slump Tables Using Slump Tables you can vary how much water is added or subtracted for each inch 25 mm of change in slump In other words if you want to add 3 inches to the slump you can create a slump table that will add one gallon for the first inch and lesser amounts for the second and third inches This method of slump adjustment can help ensure that your mix will not come out too wet or too dry by allowing you to customize each change in slump step 02 09 10 70 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 A slump table can be attached to more than one mix design or you can create a slump ta
179. een If the mix design contains a sequence code it overrides the default Auto Sequencing Yes No field that sets up basic default sequences when set to Y Feeds will start at batch start and discharge devices will start when system discharge has been activated Synch Discharge Yes No field that when set to Y holds all discharge devices until all feeds are done Tolerance Device Browseable list of extra devices that could be used to alert the operator of an out of tolerance condition SLUMP Default Default slump for this plant This value appears on the Mix Designs screen when you enter a new mix Minimum Minimum slump allowed for a mix used at this plant Maximum Maximum slump allowed for a mix used at this plant Enable Slump Table Yes No field that when set to Y allows slump tables to be used for slump calculations When slump tables are used the standard linear method of slump adjustment is not used See Slump Tables for more information Default Default slump table that will be used at batch time if Slump Tables are enabled but no slump table has been attached to the mix design on the MIX DESIGNS screen 02 09 10 115 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 FIELD DESCRIPTION Base Admix Code The code entered here is added to all mixes batched For instance if you want to add Hot water to all mixes you can create an Admix design
180. een to assign reassign materials to bins and bottles and to activate deactivate these devices From this screen you can also change feed or discharge parameters These topics are discussed later in this section A description of the fields and function keys on the MATERIAL OVERVIEW screen is given in the tables that follow the sample screen below Material Overview Screen Plant Name a STONE LLLLLLLLLL LLLLLLLLLL LLLLLLLLLIL re FIELDS FIELD DESCRIPTION Ingredient Browseable list of ingredients From Bin silo or tank to which the ingredient is assigned Note Ingredient bin assignments can be changed by pressing F6 to pull up Material Assignments screen To Scale or bottle into which the From device discharges Note Scale or measuring device assignments can be changed by pressing F5 to pull up the Feed Destinations screen Active Yes No toggle for activating deactivating the device 02 09 10 229 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 Other DESCRIPTION Extra devices are listed here Note You can change the Start Delay Pulse Time and Clear Time for one of these devices by highlighting the device and pressing F3 More to access the appropriate screen mw FUNCTION KEYS PURPOSE SHIFT F4 To pull up the Quick Edit screen to change global feed sequence parameters 1 e of aggrega
181. ement enter a in this field Effectiveness The system uses this value to determine how much of this ingredient to actually batch For example if you are batching air that is 100 effective and the target for air is 50 ounces the system batches 50 ounces If you are batching air that is 50 effective and the target for air is 50 ounces the system batches 100 ounces This field accepts values with up to two decimal places ex 60 75 Correction Factor Typically assigned to calcium ingredients and used to determine water targets Based on ingredient group type Using Calcium as the primary group ingredient and Water as the secondary group ingredient the calculation is as follows Water Water Calcium Calcium Correction Factor Material Calculation Factor Numerically this could be presented as Water 32 gl 153 6 oz 1 00 1 00 Water then equals 30 8 gl 02 09 10 39 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 FIELD Substitution DESCRIPTION Ratio of this product when it is substituted for another Acceptable values range from 1 to 1 2 Example Target weight for cement is 500 lb You want to substitute fly ash for 10 percent of the cement However cement and fly ash are not a one to one substitution It takes 1 05 units of fly ash to equal unit of cement The substitution value for fly ash is 1 05 Absorption Percentage of moisture above Oven Dry needed to achieve SSD Saturate
182. en first appears it is blank The example below shows the first page of a completed ticket script Ticket Layout Editor Screen PRINT PRINT PRINT 39 30 40 39 40 PRINT 40 39 LLLLILLLIL dll LLLLLI The table beginning on the next page explains the information you can enter into each field of the TICKET LAYOUT EDITOR You can pull up a browse list for each field except for the Column and Instance fields 02 09 10 132 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 re FIELDS 02 09 10 DESCRIPTION ACTION Line Line number on the printed ticket The NL action described below creates a new line Each time you move the cursor past a NL the line number increments by one Of Name of the ticket script Press F2 to pull up a browse list of ticket scripts 1f any have been created Action Action to be taken when a ticket is to be printed Can be selected from a F2 browse list Some actions e g PRINT affect data fields in the Data column Some actions e g NL affect printer functions only Valid actions are PRINT prints the data field listed under Data TEXT prints user defined text captions disclaimers etc FF executes a hard printer form feed NL executes a hard printer new line command Actions listed after this command pertain to a new line on the ticket HL executes a hard printer half line carriage return half linefeed RESALE begins and ends a loop for all
183. en the mixer is put into hold Interface Device When an external moisture control device is attached as a serial device you can select it in this field Serial Temper Port Mixing Time 02 09 10 When an external temper control device is attached as a serial device you can select it in this field Default length of time in seconds that the mixer mixes a load This time is used on the Batch Setup and Mix Designs screens as the default mixer time 235 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 Percent of Mix Time in DESCRIPTION Used for a shrink mixer This means you can designate a the First Mixer certain percentage of the mix time to occur while the material is in the first barrel mixer before the material goes to the tilt mixer Partial Open Time Length of time in seconds required for the mixer to open partially from the closed position Partial Open Pause Length of time in seconds the mixer remains partially open Because trucks cannot accept material as quickly as the mixer can dump it the mixer is only partially opened when it starts to load the truck Then after some of the material is in the truck the mixer will open fully Full Open Time Maximum length of time in seconds the system waits for the Open limit to be met before giving a warning message If this time is left at zero no warning message will be given Discharge Time Length of time in seconds t
184. en you restart the Spectrum assuming you properly shut down the system the night before RUNNING END OF PROCESSES All End of processes are controlled from the End of Day Procedure screen The general procedure for running End of processes is 1 Select MAIN MENU gt END OF DAY The following screen appears End of Day Procedure Screen Procedures to be run End of Day Floppy Disk of Week Backup Batch Weights of Month Database Files Backup of Year Custom Directory Backup Found BWD records not yet backed up from load ID 3341 07 02 2008 to load ID 3341 07 02 2008 It has been more than O days since the last backup of Batch Weights 2 On the top half of the screen type a Y next to the End of procedures you want to run 3 Also on the top half of the screen type a Y under the Floppy Disk or USB column not both for Backup Batch Weights and Database Files Backup You can only back up Custom directory files to floppy disk Note For Backup Batch Weights you can enter a P so that batch weights will be purged when the End of Day process is run even if batch weights have not been backed up 4 Press F1 Start to initiate the selected procedure s Once the End of process is finished the system automatically performs the proper shutdown procedure It then informs you that shutdown has been completed You may then power off the Spectrum Note If batch weights are older than the
185. enseutesvasdtcentexoeeses Be Order Entry Scree iets Bia a ee 8 ea a ENE 02 09 10 6 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 A o td la Neda ae end e Geode hacen oo Function Keys sde POMEL NO AA A NON To Edit amd it E A E dit diia AN A O OTTO Concrete Calculator Screen sccccccsssscsesesscsssessssesesessssessusssesssesssessssesssessesssseseseecsessesesesesssseaeees To Calculate Rectangular Shapes To Calculate Cylindrical Shapes Y Batch Setup Screen m A NS FUNCHON Ki as Adjusting Batch Informations 2 aa ina S The Graphsereen zas ies A da Fields Graph Screen Function Keys Gtapi Screen aisan a Startins Discharge di Ra AbortingBatches ci A a A Saeed ote TICKET PRINTING creiss enie amp costes cavevtes ds cdi incas ds II Ende te setae ex MES Ea EEEE dd aa OVE TVG Wi a A Sates bina Madd selene dees Fine Seanad Sample Ticket A soteer asao eessen E oe E oaea aeS e E SiN E Ea Eino raar iss Tolerance Error Symbols orri imaret e a eae a iei eee Editing Ticket Data lt A tada Making a Local Ticket a Dispatch Ticket ccccccsccesscecesscescecnseceaceceseceeacecaceeeaceceaeeeeaeecseeeenes 216 Reprinting Tickets co iii aria E EN A aE re To Reprint the Last Ticket re To Reprint an Older Ticket ead SA FICKEEREDOVIS so 2s avast A ISAs shore os dasa N AEA ties DARA BATCH WEIGHTS orinis e r a a nido Common Items on Batch Weight ReportS oonnnninininv nvivo amp Tolerance Error Symbols7 siec0s wivsecs Sel
186. enter the results on the ORDER ENTRY screen You can access the Concrete Calculator screen one of two ways e By selecting MAIN MENU DATA ENTRY CONCRETE CALCULATOR meaning you have to press ESC until you get back to the Main Menu or e By pressing SHIFT F8 from the ORDER ENTRY screen selecting Concrete Calculator then pressing ENTER The second method is recommended if you are already at the ORDER ENTRY screen In either case the Concrete Calculator appears Concrete Calculator Rectangles Project Length 3 Width X Plant 01 Depth i 5 Total Sub Totals Contact Customers Phone Number Edit Tickets Returned Mix Update Inventory gt Grand Ingredients Total Mix Designs Resale Products Projects Sales Tax Rates Trucks Admix Designs Concrete Calculator Procedures for using the Concrete Calculator are given next 02 09 10 189 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 w TO CALCULATE RECTANGULAR SHAPES 1 Access the Concrete Calculator as described on the previous page 2 Enter measurements for the Length Width and Depth Press ENTER after each entry After you press ENTER for the Depth the system calculates the Total Write this amount on paper so you can enter it when you go back to the ORDER ENTRY screen 3 If you need to calculate other rectangular shapes for this order press F5 after you have entered the Depth for the first shape This inserts the Total int
187. ents to Water 196 Changing Target Weights 195 Edit Truck Code After Discharge 203 Edit Truck Code Before Discharge 199 Batch Setup Screen 191 Batch Weights 217 Selecting for Printing 146 Batch Weights Export 276 Batching Defaults 113 Batching Operations Aborting Batches 211 Basic Steps Automatic Batching 174 Batching Cycle 170 Discharge Cycle 173 Feed Sequencing 172 Screens Used 175 Starting Discharge 211 Batching Screens Batch Setup 191 Concrete Calculator 189 Graph 207 Order Entry 180 Order Index amp Load Index 175 Bin Swapping 227 Bin Switching Automatic 106 Bins Screen 76 C Concrete Calculator Screen 189 Continuous Discharge 114 222 Continuous Run 114 222 Conveyor Belts Screen 100 02 09 10 297 Customers Screen 33 D Dampening Scale Flow Control 91 Database Adding a Record 30 Editing a Record 30 How Is the Database Organized 29 Viewing a Record 31 What Is the Database 29 What Is the Purpose of the Database 29 Device Property Sets 110 Disk Formatting 292 Disk Utilities 279 E Edit MMM Description Screen 69 Effectiveness of Ingredients 44 End of Day Procedures 272 End of Month Inventory Report Flag 273 Export batch weights 276 Export Batch Weights to QC Helper 290 Export Tickets to DOS File 288 Extra Devices Screen 102 F Fast Feed 81 171 Feed Configurations 81 Feed Destinations Screen 108 Feed Types 81 171 Fields Browseable 23 Defi
188. er Unit Read only field that shows the unit of measure used for the material to be tempered usu gl Complete Browseable list of I O addresses for the input that signals when temper is complete You can select the same I O point as the Tilt Limit so that when the mixer is done tilting the temper stops Type Temper device type C counter or S scale 02 09 10 237 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 REPORTS The Spectrum allows you to generate reports pertaining to batch weights inventory ingredients mix designs customers orders projects resale products tickets trucks sequences and manual material usage Reports are printed at the node destination selected for the Report printer on the PLANTS screen A sample of each report is provided in this section PRINTING REPORTS 1 Select MAIN MENU REPORTS The REPORTS MENU appears Reports Menu Batch Setup Load Index Batch Weight Reports Inventory Reports Ingredient Listing Mix Design Listing Mix Summary Report Customer Listing Order Reports Project Reports Resale Products Listing Ticket Reports Fleet Utilization Truck Production Report Manual Material Monitor Sequence Listing Cancel Report Readout Display VWxkVvVkxk ox x va 2 Select the report or report category and press ENTER 02 09 10 When you select an item having an asterisk next to 1t and press ENTER the report is generated and
189. es associated with a particular quote A quote is associated with a particular customer and may involve a large project that takes several orders to complete In this regard the Projects database is a great time saver Project information which includes customer information can be called up by project code and automatically inserted into each order thus saving a lot of typing 02 09 10 64 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 FIELDS NOTE Customer Many of the fields on the PROJECTS screen are automatically populated when the customer code is entered These default values can be changed however DESCRIPTION Code Customer code associated with the project Required field Project Code Code assigned to the project Name Name assigned to the project Notes Delivery notes for the project Status A browseable field that contains the status of the quote Valid entries are e N Normal firm e C Cancelled deletes all totals e E Ended keeps delivered totals e H Held e W Will Call Addr Delivery address for the project Account Number The name of the customer is displayed directly above this field Account Status Account status assigned to the customer attached to the project Contact Contact name from the customer record for the customer Account number of the customer attached to the project attached to the project
190. essssesesssscsessssssesssecsessssesesesecseseseseseeeeseneees 28 E Escape Key PLE ida dois 28 Function Key Prompts Screen SpecifiC cccccccccscscscsesesesesesesesensnesssesnseseseseseseseseseseneaenenensnsnaeas 28 The Spectrum Database viascscccescsvonsssssecssoncssenosssenvasennvevsesnnscvanosvestescnaecvssesievec sseenvesenavoeee 20 WHAT IS THE DATABASE cecesssccudectcedegssacacel estes idedeucacededesudep uaecccedesvdeigncacca ced evs sodeneadeecesedede idas 29 How IS THE DATABASE ORGANIZED ccccecessesececececsesssaececececeeseauececececeeneuecececececsesaeceeeceesensaaeeeeeeeenes 29 02 09 10 3 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 WHAT IS THE PURPOSE OF THE DATABASE ooncoconoconononnonananoncononananononnonnnanenconnnanarononnon arranco non EE ei eiea ose 29 TO ADDA DATABASE TABLE RECORD peoe ioir eni reari aAa r Eee EEEE E ESEVE EEA EER EEE 30 TO EDIT A DATABASE TABLE RECORD coccconocnonccnncanannonncnnoranonornnonnonaoncannncnnanernnonnonaonnon anna cane ranoncnnarananaos 30 TO VIEW A DATABASE TABLE RECORD occcococonocncnncanonncnnannonononacononnonananan EA E E ENN E 31 To DELETE A DATABASE TABLE RECORD eaoin e aE e Eaa EEES E RN O EVEEN E 31 SCREENS NOT DISCUSSED IN THIS SECTION ccccscsssssesssesscssesscsesssessesesesecssesscsesseasasesseesessssssesssssesaeases 31 SALES TAX RATES 5 ivcss eves cacsvesuvesexy dustesepsevieg sues snestevevisedpcupucecs dada id 32 O A vig E cosets Tee oe ES eh TS BE EE A 32 gt SFU
191. eviations for days of the week Press ENTER The cursor moves to the Full Path and File Name field If you want to use another file path and name besides the ones specified in the Directory and File Name fields enter it here Press F1 to export the batch weights 291 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 FORMAT DISKS This utility allows you to format a floppy disk or USB removable device on your Spectrum workstation Spectrum allows you to format disks in QNX or DOS Floppy disks used for data backups must be formatted in QNX Floppy disks used for exporting ticket data must be formatted in DOS USB removable devices used for both data backups and ticket exports must be formatted first in QNX then in DOS If it is formatted in DOS then QNX the DOS partition will be wiped out by the QNX formatting Format Disk Drive J Size of Floppy Disk I To FORMAT A FLOPPY DISK 1 Select MAIN MENUSYSTEM MAINTENANCE DISK UTILITIES FORMAT DISK 2 The Drive field is selected with First as the default entry Use this if you want to format a floppy disk in the standard floppy drive In this case press ENTER to move to the Size of Floppy Disk field If you need to select another drive press F2 to browse the Drive field Select the appropriate drive and press ENTER Press ENTER again to move to the Size of Floppy Disk field The following table shows the type of formatting that can be accomplished with eac
192. evice can also be used for MMM events instead of the IO of the original device An MMM event occurs when material is manually batched When the open discharge IO point of the bottle or scale is activated the MMM event is started and the current scale or counter value is recorded At the done event the current scale or counter value is recorded and a Spectrum mat_log record is created The difference between the done and start values is the amount used If an MMM event occurs during an auto load when any other auto feeds are feeding into a shared batcher scale or metered feed the auto feed is aborted and an errpop is displayed stating what happened The amount used and the load_id are recorded as part of the MMM event 02 09 10 111 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 Example PSET assignments Source Property Destination Comments Device Set Device BINO1 PSETOO1 AGG1 SCALE BINO1 PSET002 AGG2 SCALE This configuration is rarely used AGG1 SCALE PSET010 MIXER AGG1 SCALE PSETO11 TRUCK AGG2 SCALE PSETO12 TRUCK This configuration is rarely used WATER PSETO20 MIXER WATER PSETO21 TRUCK ADMIXO1 PSETO30 BOTTLEO1 ADMIXO1 PSETO31 MIXER ADMI X01 PSETO32 TRUCK 02 09 10 112 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 BATCHING amp SYSTEM DEFAULTS After plant devices have been set up and materials assigned to devices batching and system default
193. fined user accounts ALKON MANAGER and USER ALKON has been selected in the User Code field in the following screen example Notice that this user account has full access to the system User Security Setup Alkon User Code User Security Setup Report Menu Plant Setup Menu Inventory Menu System Maintenance Menu Batch Setup Screen View Batch Weights Screen Customers amp Sales Taxes Screens Ingredients Screen Price Screen Custom Equation Editor Add Delete Equipment Quick Ticket Screen Disable Load Index Editing Demand Plant Batching Load Index Screen Projects Screens Mini Dispatch Mix and Admix Design Screens Orders amp Tickets Resale Products Screen System Defaults amp User Screens User Login Screen Allow User to Start Batch with RUN Allow Batch from Yesterday s Orders Allow RUN From All Screens End of Day Screen amp Utility Menu Node 1 Only Batchbook Base and Cement Screens For each screen or function listed on this screen an N prevents access and a Y allows access except for Disable Load Index Editing an N here actually allows Load Index editing NOTE Do not deny access to User Login Screen if you want the user to be able to login with another user code and change their access privileges 02 09 10 168 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 If you select MANAGER in the User Code field the following screen appears with fewer
194. for Hot water then enter its code in this field Hot water would then be automatically added to each mix that was batched NOTE Changes to the following fields require a reboot Number of Feeds Maximum number of feeds that this plant may have active at any one time DO NOT change this without calling Command Alkon first Usually set to 20 feeds Maximum of 100 Allowed Yes No field that sets whether the system is allowed to switch to a secondary bin if the primary bin runs low We recommend that this be set to Y Auto Yes No field that sets whether the system switches to a secondary bin without alerting the operator that bin switching is occurring If this field is set to Y the Allow field must also be set to Y Permanent Yes No field that sets whether the system is allowed to make a secondary bin the primary bin if the original primary bin runs empty Should be set to Y Default Batch Code Default batch code that appears on the Batch Setup screen Choices are B Print ticket WITHOUT batch weights Y Print ticket WITH batch weights Default Simulation Default simulation status that appears on the Batch Setup Code screen Choices are B Run an actual batch S Run a simulated batch T Run a training batch Save Simulated Drops Yes No field that sets whether the system will save records for debugging purposes from simulated batches 02 09 10
195. g section make any necessary adjustments and press F9 to run the batch 225 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 QUICK TICKET The Quick Ticket function lets you print a ticket without batching a load of concrete This function is accessed from the ORDER INDEX screen and is normally used for non concrete orders When entering a non concrete order the mix code should be entered as something like NONE or PRODUCT to distinguish it from orders of concrete To generate a Quick Ticket 1 Enter a Mix Design with no materials In the Mix Code field enter something that identifies this mix design as being used for non concrete orders Examples ADD ONS NONE PRODUCT Save this mix design 2 Enter an order that contains the appropriate non concrete product s Pull in the mix design you entered in Step 1 above Save this order It will appear on your ORDER INDEX Select MAIN MENU gt ORDER INDEX and select the order to quick ticket 4 Press F3 The screen shown next appears Quick Ticket Box Order Date Job Name Mix Code Truck Code Load Size Plant Name Firm Will Call 0 00 Firm Orders 5 All information except for Truck Code is filled in by the system Enter a Truck Code if applicable and press ENTER 6 Press F1 to print the ticket 02 09 10 226 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 BIN SWAPPING The MATERIAL
196. h drive selection DRIVE TYPE OF FORMATTING Formats a disk placed in the first floppy drive in a 02 09 10 292 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 QNX format Second Formats a disk placed in the second floppy drive in a QNX format A Formats a disk placed in the first floppy drive in a DOS format B Formats a disk placed in the second floppy drive in a DOS format USB Formats a USB removable device in a QNX format See the instructions below for formatting a USB removable device 3 In the Size of Floppy Disk field 1 44 M is the default You can select another one from the browse list then press ENTER to enter it in this field 4 Press F1 to start the formatting process Follow the on screen instructions FORMATTING A USB REMOVABLE DEVICE FOR QNX Before you can write to a USB device from Spectrum it must be formatted for QNX Only do this once because all data on the device is erased 1 Select MAIN MENU SYSTEM MAINTENANCE DISK UTILITIES FORMAT DISK 2 Inthe Drive field select USB 3 Press F1 then follow the on screen instructions FORMATTING A USB REMOVABLE DEVICE FOR DOS If the USB device will be used to transfer store data in a DOS Windows format you will need to format the device on a Windows PC The following example uses a Windows XP SP2 PC 1 Connect the USB device to the Windows PC 2 After Windows recognizes the device open My Computer a
197. hat the mixer remains fully open Close Time Maximum length of time in seconds the system waits for the Closed limit to be met before giving a warning message If this time is left at zero no warning message will be given INPUTS Open Limit indicates when the mixer is in the tilted position Close Limit Browseable list of I O addresses for the limit switch that indicates when the mixer is in the righted position Running Browseable list of I O addresses for the switch that signals when the mixer is running If material is loaded into a mixer that is not running it may not be possible to start the mixer due to the added weight of the material Hold Browseable list of I O addresses for the HOLD button on the manual station Pressing the HOLD button stops the automatic dumping of material from the mixer into the truck OUTPUTS Open Browseable list of I O addresses for the tilt signal sent from the system to the mixer Close Browseable list of I O addresses for the righted signal sent from the system to the mixer Mix Time Done Browseable list of I O addresses for the signal sent from Browseable list of I O addresses for the limit switch that the system to the mixer when mix time has expired 02 09 10 TEMPER 236 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 Material Code DESCRIPTION Browseable list of names for materials to be tempered usu Wat
198. he Scale Start Tare then subtracting the Fast Feed Plant Erraticness and Preact values The Safe Target is less than the requested Target so that fast feeding does not overshoot the requested Target Note If no Preact Overide is set and a learned Preact is not available the Default Preact value is used Fast Feed begins if Fast Feed is enabled for the bin and the Safe Target is greater than the Minimum to Fast Feed value Initially Fast Feed conditionality opens two gates and continuously monitors the scale for the amount left to feed When the amount left to feed reaches the Extra Gate Shutoff value if enabled the second gate is closed The first gate is closed when the Safe Target value is reached Note When a feed s Safe Target is less than the Minimum to Fast Feed value Fast Feed is skipped and the system goes directly to Timed Feed gt TIMED FEED Timed Feed is a timed opening of a single gate for a time duration based on the previous Flow Rates for the bin and material If Timed Feed is enabled and the amount left to feed is greater than the Minimum to Time Feed value the system calculates a time duration to open the gate based on the found information A bucket is a weight range of previous drop records used for calculating the current drop time or preact If drop records are disabled either the Default Preact or Preact Override value is used 02 09 10 81 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 As with Fas
199. he Timed Feed Plant Erraticness percentage or absolute value Multiple Timed Feeds can occur up to the Maximum Number of Timed Feeds value re JOG FEED Jog Feed is typically used for aggregates and cements and opens and closes the gate enough to allow small jog bites of material to fall through The time duration the gate opens and closes depends on the Jog Weight Jog Time and Jog Settle Time values The system automatically adjusts the Jog Time by the Jog Time Adjust value to achieve the Jog Weight per jog Jog Feed can start if ALL of the following are true 02 09 10 171 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 e Jog Feed is enabled e Fast and or Timed Feed finishes without getting the material to target e The Maximum Number of Jogs is a non zero value MULTI BATCHING Some plants must make several small batches because of limited batching capacity To solve this problem the Spectrum divides a load into smaller batches if the load amount exceeds the maximum batch size set for the system Once started batching continues until the entire load is batched gt FEED SEQUENCING Sequencing gives you complete control over the feeding of ingredients Feed sequences define when a device starts and stops and the quantity of material that should be fed A separate sequence is created for each device Many conditions can be set for sequences making any discussion of this topic a difficult one One simple condition could be that th
200. he computer sends to close the gate Vibrator VO point for the signal to turn the vibrator on and off 02 09 10 87 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 DESCRIPTION Gate2 Open Used for dual gate discharge control I O point for the signal the computer sends to open the gate Gate2 Close Used for dual gate discharge control I O point for the signal the computer sends to close the gate PAGE 2 SCALES SCREEN Time between Flow Calculation Updates Length of time between the computer s flow rate calculations Flow based on scale The scale that this scale watches to base its own flow control on Ib Hold Type Types are N No hold Y Hold the based on device until flow resumes S System hold operator releases Plus Indicates the amount of material on the belt the amount of material still to be blended after the scale reads empty Maximum Flow Rate for Based on Scale Maximum flow rate allowed for the scale selected in the Flow based on field above Score Board Port Port parameter that identifies the device used as a remote scale display Port parameters are entered on the Port Parameters screen Serial Scale Port Port parameter that identifies the device used as a serial scale Port parameters are entered on the Port Parameters screen Open2 Time at Start Length of time in seconds the gate should be opened at the start
201. her Group Typically Admixtures are based on Cements Second Group First Group x Correction Factor Corrects the amount of one Group using the amount of another Group Typically Admixtures or Aggregates correct Waters First Group First Group Effectiveness Factor Used to determine how much to adjust the target of a material according to the material s Effectiveness percentage First Group First Group x Substitution Factor Used when one material is substituted for another and it is not a one to one substitution For example it takes 1 05 units of flyash to equal 1 unit of cement First Group First Group x Mat Calculation Factor Used for adding multiple parameters as necessary to a group of materials All Groups All Groups x Load Size_Amount Used when Returned Concrete amounts are excluded from load size and target calculations in multi batch loads First Group First Group x Load Size_Amount Used when Returned Concrete amounts are excluded from load size and target calculations in single batch loads Second Group Second Group First Group Batch Errors Used to correct one material based on the batching error of another material example water corrections based on ice Note This material calculation type must be entered on the last line of the Material Calculations screen All Groups All Groups x Load Size_Amount Ret Used when calculated material amounts are multiplied by the load size to de
202. her the system will run Number of the next load for this plant Each time a load without the operator pressing the F9 RUN button Continuous Discharge Yes No field that sets whether the system will discharge without the operator pressing the F11 DISCH button WATER Trim Ingredient to be trimmed on the Batch Setup screen Normally water Both this field and the Adjust field must match the main water ingredient or the trim and adjustment of water will not work For instance if the main water is COLD then both fields must have COLD selected This is a browseable field 02 09 10 114 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 FIELD Default Default amount of water to be trimmed from each yd meter This value appears on the Batch Setup screen Adjust Ingredient to be adjusted on the Batch Setup screen where you can adjust the ingredient on a load basis 1 e gallons per Load Min in Truck Minimum amount of water that can be recorded as in the truck when the load is batched This value appears on the Batch Setup screen as In Truck Max in Truck Maximum amount of water that can be recorded as in the truck when the load is batched This value appears on the Batch Setup screen as In Truck SEQUENCE Base Base sequence for this plant Base means the mix sequence is laid on top of this one Default Default sequence code that is pulled onto the Batch Setup scr
203. here amount could not be accurately determined ACK END OF REPORT 02 09 10 270 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 SEQUENCE LISTING Only the first few steps of the first sequence is shown Thursday March 23 2000 SEQUENCES REPORT SOURCE DESTINATION AGG SCALE AGG SCALE TRUCK QUANTITY 100 START F WAT SCALE HLDBCK_ V DVT AT DRY START DELAY 0 00 seconds MULTI BATCH Y TRACEPOINTS ON N TYPE F CHARGE RATE 100 USE TRUCK CHARGE RATE N SKIP DISCHARGE AUTHORIZATION N STOP COMMENT Start agg scale when intial water has fed and Divertor at Dry SOURCE DESTINATION BOTTLEO1 BOTTLEO1 TRUCK QUANTITY 100 START V DVT AT DRY START DELAY 0 00 seconds MULTI BATCH Y TRACEPOINTS ON N TYPE F CHARGE RATE 0 USE TRUCK CHARGE RATE SKIP DISCHARGE AUTHORIZATION N STOP COMMENT Divertor is at Dry SOURCE DESTINATION BOTTLEO2 BOTTLEO2 TRUCK QUANTITY 100 START V DVT AT DRY START DELAY 0 00 seconds MULTI BATCH Y TRACEPOINTS ON N TYPE F CHARGE RATE 0 USE TRUCK CHARGE RATE SKIP DISCHARGE AUTHORIZATION MN STOP COMMENT Divertor is at Dry 02 09 10 271 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 END OF DAY PROCEDURES The End of Day process provides a way for you to run daily weekly monthly or yearly reports and back up the database all at the same time Once the processes are set up simply press F1 Start from The End of Day Procedure Screen to run them CATEGORIES T
204. here are four separate End of Day categories Daily Weekly Monthly and Yearly Each category lists Reports and Procedures you can select to run or not run You cannot add reports or procedures you can only choose which ones to run or not run SELECTING WHAT TO RUN To select which procedures and reports to run for a category 1 Select MAIN MENU END OF DAY A screen similar to the one shown next appears End of Day Procedure Screen Procedures to be run of Day fj Floppy Disk of week Backup Batch Weights of Month Database Files Backup of Year Custom Directory Backup Found BWD records not yet backed up from load ID 3341 07 02 2008 to load ID 3341 07 02 2008 It has been more than O days since the last backup of Batch Weights 2 Press F6 Setup A selection box showing the following categories appears e End of Day Setup e End of Week Setup End of Month Setup e End of Year Setup 02 09 10 272 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 3 Select a category and press ENTER The appropriate setup screen appears In the following example we selected End of Day End of Day Setup Screen Incoming Listing e o Fleet Util Resale by Customer Voided MMM by Material Non COD Today s BW by Plant Current All Truck Prod by Bin Tomorrow by Customer Avg Moist Mix All Plants Yesterday Exception Mix Clear and Reset Daily Inventory Backup Data to Floppy Winlink Inventory File Export Backup D
205. hether the byte order of the ASCII CRC is switched This has no effect on the binary CRC No Limit Yes No field Ulink maintains an internal queue of tickets that it receives With No Limit enabled if the queue is full and a new ticket arrives the earliest ticket is removed NOTE With recent changes this option is obsolete No Wait ACK Yes No field Sets whether the system disregards the receipt of acknowledgements 02 09 10 152 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 Baud Rate Data Bits DESCRIPTION Browseable field Amount of information transmitted in bits per second A bit is a binary unit of information a 0 or a 1 Default is 9600 NOTE Be sure the modem and serial port can transmit data at the baud rate selected Browseable field Number of data bits sent between stop bits Choices are 6 7 and 8 The default is 8 Parity Browseable field Parity is used for error checking to ensure that no information is lost in transmission Default is N Choices are N None O Odd E Even M Mark S Space Stop Bits Browseable field Number of bits that act as markers between the data bits Choices are 1 or 2 The default is sl s Duplex connected to PCs Default is F Choices are F Full PC echoes commands you type H Half feature is turned off DTR DSR
206. his publication Should Command Alkon Incorporated modify its products in a way that may affect the information contained in this publication Command Alkon Incorporated assumes no obligation whatever to inform any user of the modification This publication may contain technical inaccuracies or typographical errors Command Alkon Incorporated assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in this manual This publication is intended only for the direct benefit of users of Command Alkon Incorporated products This manual may not be used for any purposes other than those for which it is provided Information disclosed herein was originated by and is the property of Command Alkon Incorporated and except for rights granted by written consent such information shall not be disclosed disseminated or duplicated in whole or in part Command Alkon Incorporated reserves all patent proprietary design manufacturing use and reproduction rights Command Alkon Incorporated 1800 International Park Drive Suite 400 Birmingham AL 35243 4232 205 879 3282 5168 Blazer Parkway Dublin OH 43017 1339 614 799 6650 www commandalkon com Microsoft Windows and SQL are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation of Redmond Washington COMMANDseries and the names of its components such as COMMANDconcrete and COMMANDnetwork Spectrum Eagle and COMMANDbatch are registered trademarks of Command Alkon Incorporated All rights reserved 02 09
207. ield is First Press ENTER to select this entry The cursor moves to the Directory field First refers to the standard floppy disk drive on your workstation Second is valid if you have two floppy drives USB can only be used if a USB removable device has been set up and connected to the PC 4 The default for the Directory field is Database Press ENTER to accept this value The cursor moves to the Files field 5 From the browse list select one of the following options and press ENTER e All Data Files e Customers Mixes Ingredients Orders e Projects e Trucks 6 Press F1 to start the restore process Follow the on screen instructions When the restore process is complete the system automatically reboots rr TO RESTORE FROM USB REMOVABLE DEVICE USB removable device restore procedures are the same as those for restoring from floppy disk except that USB must be entered in the Drive field 02 09 10 282 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 HARD DI SK BACKUP amp RESTORE When an End of Day process is run the entire database can be backed up However files cannot be backed up individually and the database cannot be restored through the End of Day process This is where the Hard Disk Backup amp Restore disk utilities option is useful Through this option all or parts of the database can be backed up to or restored from the hard drive Hard disk backup and restore functions are performed from the
208. ient is based on each 100 lb kg of another ingredient usually cement The amount of the ingredient is a percentage of the amount of another ingredient sg Used for slurry calculations based on the specific gravity of the slurry and water Internal Inventory Units in which all internal calculations are done This unit should be the least common denominator of all units entered in the Units section so it is usually lb kg or fl oz ml Unit of measure in which inventory for this ingredient is displayed Purchase Unit of measure in which the ingredient is purchased Adjust Unit used to perform the adjustment calculation on the ingredient The amount of the ingredient in each load is changed by the amount entered for the adjustment factor This is an absolute amount and is not proportional to the load size as in the trim calculation Usually used only with water Trim Unit used to perform the trim calculation on the ingredient The load size is multiplied by the trim factor to obtain the change in the ingredient amount for the load Usually used only with water Weight Unit of measure in which the material is weighed such as lb or kg To Volume Unit of measure for the volume of the ingredient such as gallons gl or fluid ounces oz Mostly for liquids 02 09 10 36 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 FIELD DESCRIPTION Unit Factor Contains the number by
209. ights by Load A selection screen appears with cursor on the Start Load field 2 Enter the appropriate load ID and press ENTER Or press F2 to pull up a list of load ID s highlight the appropriate ID and press ENTER Tab down to the End Load field Repeat the process given in Step 2 4 Press F1 to send the report to the printer An example is shown below Monday September 25 2000 BATCH WEIGHTS REPORT for load thru load CUSTOMER TICKET NO LOAD NO PLANT NAME LINDSEY CONST 8898 8908 01 TRUCK USER LOGIN DRIVER TICKET NUM TICKET ID TIME DATE ALKON 8898 336 13 41 09 25 2000 LOAD SIZE MIX CODE SEQ LOAD ID 10 00 yd 3500 W 427 MATERIAL DESIGN QTY REQUIRED BATCHED VAR ABSP MOISTURE ACTUAL WAT SAND 1610 lb 16905 lb 16852 3d3 5 00 M 96 16 gl 57 STONE 1740 lb 17444 lb 17388 32 0 25 M 9 20 gl CEMENT 1 450 lb 4500 lb 4488 eZ TS COLD 28 0 gl 178 3 gl 176 4 1 07 176 44 gl AIR 3 50 oz 35 00 oz 36 38 3 94 REDUCER 16 75 oz 167 50 oz 169 00 0 90 SIMULATED NUM BATCHES 1 LOAD TOTAL 40213 lb WATER CEMENT 0 517T DESIGN WATER 280 0 gl ACTUAL WATER 277 8 gl TO ADD 2 2 gl WATER IN TRUCK 0 0 gl SLUMP 3 00 ADJUST WATER 0 0 gl load TRIM WATER LOAD COMPLETED LOAD TIME 02 26 TARES AGG SCALE B 1 ST O ET 79 lb CEM SCALE B WAT SCALE B 1 ST O ET 14 lb NOTE When oven dry mixes are used the 7 MOISTURE and ACTUAL WAT column labels will read FREE WAT and FREE WATER respectively 02 0
210. ights for dates other than today enter the appropriate date in MMDDY Y Y Y format the system supplies the slashes and press ENTER Or press F2 to pull up a list of dates highlight the appropriate date and press ENTER 3 Tab over to the Load ID field Press F2 to pull up a list of load ID s for the selected date 4 Highlight the appropriate load ID from the list As soon as you press ENTER the Batch Weights Report appears for that load ID 5 To view batch weights for other load ID s for the selected date press PAGE UP or PAGE DOWN 6 Press F1 to send the report for the selected load ID to the printer An example is shown below 02 09 10 239 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 2000 KKK Monday September 25 for load thru load CUSTOMER LINDSEY CONST TRUCK USER LOGIN ALKON MIX CODE 3500 DESIGN 1610 1740 450 28 0 3 90 16 75 DRIVER LOAD SIZE 10 00 yd MATERIAL SAND 57 STONE CEMENT I COLD AIR REDUCER SIMULATED LOAD TOTAL 40213 lb ACTUAL WATER 277 8 gl SLUMP 3 00 ADJUST LOAD COMPLETED LOAD T AGG SCALE B 1 ST WAT SCALE B 1 ST QTY lb lb lb gl REQUIRED 6905 lb 7444 lb 4500 lb 78 3 gl Oz 35 00 oz 36 38 oz 167 50 oz 169 00 NUM BATCHES 1 WATER CEMENT TO ADD 2 2 gl WATER 0 0 gl ME 02 26 ET ET BATCHED 16852 17388 4488 176 4 0 0 79 14 lb lb NOTE TICKET NO TICKET NUM 0 517T DESIGN BATCH WEIGHTS REPORT 8
211. include items such as rebar fiber mesh sand and gloves These items are sold along with concrete meaning they are included on the order Resale products can be added to an order any time before the order is batched but the best time to enter them is when the order is first entered Information about resale products is stored in the Resale Products database table Resale products are added and edited on the RESALE PRODUCTS screen To access this screen select MAIN MENU DATA ENTRY RESALE PRODUCTS Resale Products Screen Code Ingredient Alias Description Plant Internal Unit Account Number Quantity Type B Taxable Sale Unit Auto Add N Internal to Sale Unit Factor Threshold Inventory Unit List Price Inventory Internal Unit Factor Inventory Enable Purchase Unit Decimal Points Purchase Inventory Unit Factor Deduct from Ingredient Hand 150 000 150 000 Used Used Used Used FIELDS DESCRIPTION Code assigned to the resale product You may browse this field to see a list of resale products in the database Ingredient Alias Used only when an ingredient is used as a resale product Browseable list of ingredients See Ingredients Used as Resale Products for more information Description Full name given to the resale product Plant Plant code You may browse this field to choose another plant Account Number Account number assigned to the product Defaults to the resale
212. ion on which you have installed DOS To return to Spectrum exit DOS then press CTRL ALT DEL Release all of the keys at the same time 02 09 10 19 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 USING WINDOWS FROM THE SPECTRUM Customers with the Microsoft Windows Access from Spectrum option may start Windows directly from the Spectrum without rebooting the PC Do NOT start Windows on a node when that node is in the middle of a batch To start Windows from Spectrum press ALT W Starting Windows will not affect the operation of other nodes but the node on which you started Windows will not be able to batch until you exit Windows When you exit Windows the Spectrum screen will re appear SHUTDOWN PROCEDURE Shutdown is automatically performed at the end of the End of Day process If you wish to shut down before the end of the day the Quit Spectrum procedure given below should always be followed CAUTION Never shut the computer s power off unless you perform either an End of Day or a Quit Spectrum procedure Failure to do so can result in data loss QUIT SPECTRUM PROCEDURE 1 Select MAIN MENU gt QUIT SPECTRUM A warning screen appears 2 Press F1 to acknowledge the warning The system begins the shutdown process this may take a few minutes The Spectrum system informs you when shutdown is complete 3 Turn off the power to the Spectrum computer NOTE If you try to quit the Spectrum while a batch is in progress a
213. ions Bases and corrects the amount of one Group based on the amount of Ingredients in the same Group The usual Groups affected by this calculation are Cements or Waters For example Flyash can be based on and also correct Cement Y Slurry First Group First Group 1 Total Solids Used to adjust the main water to account for the water in the slurry mix Note The calculation that determines the amount of water in the slurry mix is done before any adjustments for moisture and before based on calculations that consider water groups Z One LoadSize First Group First Group x Load Size_Amount Ret Used when calculated material amounts are multiplied by the load size to determine amounts for a material group in the load Internally pounds are converted to kilograms for material calculations and then converted back into pounds For these calculations a Weight to Volume conversion factor must be entered for the ingredient on the Ingredients screen 02 09 10 127 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 SLURRY CALCULATIONS There are three methods for slurry calculations e Percentage substitution of slurry water against main water e Absolute entry of slurry water amount in the mix design e Mix slurry target specific gravity Corrections against water can be made on either a Percentage or an Absolute basis For the Percentage method corrections are made against the main fresh water For the Absolute metho
214. irst command on the above screen means you have to scroll to the right to see the rest of the command The complete command is ctdu dqP product M product_type M To MPORT Mix DESIGNS 1 Select MAIN MENUSYSTEM MAINTENANCE DISK UTILITIES IMPORT DATA FILES 2 Select the Node Number of your Spectrum computer and press ENTER 3 Select the Disk Drive containing the floppy disk Choices are First DOS Floppy Second DOS Floppy First DOS Hard Disk Second DOS Hard Disk QNX Directory Winlink Directory USB Removable Device BSsOUNe gt 02 09 10 295 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 4 Enter the appropriate pre process commands mix file name and import ini file See the sample screen on the previous page Be sure to enter a Y for the prep commands and import line 5 Press F4 The system deletes mix designs and material records from the Spectrum and imports mix designs from the floppy Slump information is included in our example 02 09 10 296 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 I NDEX A Aborting Batches 211 Absolute Value Ingredients 43 Admix Designs Screen 53 admix modifiers 56 Admixture Bottles Screen 96 Assigning Materials 104 Auto Bin Switching 106 B Backup amp Restore Batch Weights 286 Floppy or Zip Disk 280 Hard Drive 283 Bar Code Printing 148 Batch on Receipt 174 Batch Setup Adjusting Truck Charge Rate 206 Adjustments to Moisture 197 Adjustm
215. is an optional mode that allows you to queue a batch while another one is running You can queue up to 3 batches each with a different or the same mix design Simply put freewheeling means that as soon as a device e g scale or bottle is emptied it starts weighing up the next or queued batch gt TO FREEWHEEL 1 02 09 10 Select the first load from the ORDER INDEX or LOAD INDEX and send it to the BATCH SETUP screen Or pull up a mix design on the BATCH SETUP screen Make any necessary adjustments to the batch and press either F9 or ALT F9 to queue this load for the first time Do one of the following to queue a second load e Escape back to the ORDER INDEX or LOAD INDEX and send another order to the BATCH SETUP screen Make any necessary adjustments and press ALT F9 to queue this load or e Press ALT F9 from the GRAPH screen while the first load is weighing up to queue up the same mix a second time In either case the RUN prompt at the top of the screen changes to RUN2 You can queue a third load by repeating step 3 This time the RUN prompt changes to RUN3 To initiate discharge press F11 any time during the batch process NOTES gt As scales and bottles weigh up for the 1 load an asterisk appears just to the left of the device name on the GRAPH screen As these devices weigh up for the 2 and 3 loads a period appears instead of the gt The load number
216. ject Listing i Project by Customer Expired Projects Current Orders Tomorrow s Orders Yesterday s Orders Future Orders Past Orders i All Orders Select Order Dates Loads by Order Orders by Plant Projects by Last Used Date C O D Tickets Voided Tickets Non C O D Tickets All tickets Tickets by Customer Batching Defaults Port Parameters Modem amp Terminal Parameters System Defaults Time amp Date Setup Mx Classes Printer Setup Plants Users Material Calculations Ticket Layout Editor Batch Weight Options Disk Utilities gt Custom Controls Editor Manual Station Labels S O Number amp Customer Name Network Update Debugging by Node gt means the item is another menu means the report will be generated and printed 26 Floppy Removable Media Backup amp Restore Hard Disk Backup amp Restore Batch Weights Backup amp Restore Export Tickets to DOS File Purge amp Rebuild Database Rebuild Individual Database Index Repair Corrupt Database File Format Disk Floppy Disk Copy Import Data Files Winlink File Transfer Convert Database Files From 6 04 Convert Ticket Files From 6 04 Convert Database Files From 6 05 Update Spectrum Purge Batchbook Mixes Left Buttons A 8 B Right Buttons C 8 D Left Scales Right Scales Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 BASIC SCREEN LAYOUT Each Spectrum screen has its own function but th
217. l out of tolerance 02 09 10 221 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 ADVANCED BATCHING FEATURES MULTI BATCHING The Spectrum can run batches automatically back to back This is called multi batching There are two different ways to multi batch Continuous Run and Freewheeling Each of these methods is discussed in this section wm CONTINUOUS RUN If you need to batch the same mix design over and over used mostly for products plants you can use the Continuous Run feature gt TO SET UP CONTINUOUS RUN Set the Continuous Run field of the Batching Defaults screen to Y The Continuous Discharge field of this same screen should also be set to Y gt TO RUN CONTINUOUS BATCHES 1 2 Start the load Press SHIFT F9 The RUN prompt at the top of the GRAPH screen appears as CRUN To initiate discharge do one of the following e For continuous discharge press SHIFT F11 The DISCH prompt at the top of the screen changes to CDISC Then press F11 to arm continuous discharge The CDISC prompt turns white or e To discharge each batch individually press F11 any time during the batch process NOTES If error pops appear for any batch you must press F11 again to reset discharge authorization gt TO STOP CONTI NUOUS BATCHI NG Press SHIFT F9 while the last batch is weighing up 02 09 10 222 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 rm FREEWHEELI NG Freewheeling
218. lay Number of seconds the system will ring the line trying to establish a connection Default is 10 seconds Hangup Delay Number of seconds the system will hold the line open This should be set high enough to ensure that tickets and reports have completed printing Default is 60 seconds Init Format Command codes necessary to initialize this printer Used primarily to advance and retreat paper change fonts etc especially for serial dial up printers Default is a blank entry NOTE Modem Init Phone Number and Hangup String are used only if Line Type D Modem Init Command codes necessary for the modem to be initialized Check the manual for the modem for the correct codes Default is ATZ Phone Number Phone number of this destination device if this is a dial up printer and the codes needed to open the phone line and start a dial tone Default is ATDT Hangup String Command codes necessary for the modem to stop transmitting and hang up the phone line Default is 4 On the PLANT screen shown next select the appropriate printer for the Ticket Report Logging and any other device destinations Note Descriptions of fields on the PLANT screen begin on the next page 02 09 10 154 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 Name il Code Next Ticket Number Loading Time Washdown Time Startup Time Cleanout Time Batching Node Remote Plant Calculate
219. lculating the current drop time or preact If drop records are disabled either the Default Preact or Preact Override value is used Moisture Probe Y N Yes No field that indicates whether a moisture probe is installed in this device 02 09 10 78 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 FIELD DESCRIPTION Hold Feed Browseable field of I O points for the gate hold limit switch Automatically shuts the gate 1f a problem is detected by the system Gate Closed Browseable field of 1 O points for the gate close limit switch Gate 1 Browseable field of I O points for Gate 1 Gate 2 Browseable field of I O points for Gate 2 Gate 3 Browseable field of I O points for Gate 3 Gate Close Browseable field of I O points for the gate close output Vibrator Browseable field of I O points for the vibrator output JOG FEED Allow Jog Yes No field that enables disables jogs which are the smallest units in which material can be fed Maximum Number of Maximum number of times the system will jog the gate Jogs open Jog Weight Amount of material that will fall when the gate is opened for the Jog Time duration Normally set to one scale graduation Jog Settle Time Length of time the gate should stay closed between jogs to allow the scale to settle Normally set at one second Jog Time Length of time for the gate to feed the Jog Weight of material Must be greater than 20ms and less th
220. loading etc F4 Pricing Displays pricing for each product on the order You cannot change pricing through this function F5 Discount Pulls up a window so you can make pricing and discount 02 09 10 182 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 changes to products on the order You can also add or edit Consistence and Extended Description information required for EN 206 users F6 Ticket Pulls up a list of tickets against this order You can edit these tickets and you can pull up the batch weights for this ticket F7 Clear Cancels changes before you have saved them F8 Cancel Shortcut key that enters C for cancelled order in the Order Status field 02 09 10 183 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 rr TO ENTER AN ORDER 1 Select MAIN MENU gt DATA ENTRY ORDERS The ORDER ENTRY screen appears with the cursor in the Order Code field The Order Code is automatically assigned by the system Press ENTER to move to the Customer field NOTE Ifyou want to change the date of the order say to create an order for tomorrow press SHIFT TAB from the Code field to move to the Date field Type the desired order date and press ENTER Move to the Customer field Either browse to select or type the customer code and press ENTER The cursor moves to the Project field For non Project related orders Press ENTER to bypass the Project field and move
221. ls or destinations to them On the BINS screen 2 pages shown next you can add a bin or edit parameters for an existing one A description of each field on this screen is given after that As with many Spectrum screens you can go directly to other related screens from this one For instance you can press F4 to go to the I O Assignments screen or F5 to go to the Material Assignments screen 02 09 10 Bins Screen Page 1 Mixer 1 BIN 1 Material Feed Rate 800 00 1b 1 Sec Keyboard Hold 1 Display Group 1 Allow Early Feed y Disable Drop Records N Fast Feed Allow Fast Feed Y Auger Feed N Code Allow Negative Preact N ice lb Default Preact Preact Override Plant Erraticness 60 Minimum to Fast Feed 1500 00 lb Extra Gate Shutoff 2500 00 1b Fast Batch Tolerance 0 00 lb Timed Feed Allow Timed Feed Y Maximum Number of Timed Feeds 3 Plant Erraticness 10 0 60 00 lb Minimum to Time Feed 250 00 1b Sh F3 Unlearn 00 lb 00 lb BINS 97 STONE Monitor Enabled E Moisture Probe Y N Y Hold Feed Gate Closed Gate 1 Gate 2 Gate 3 Gate Close Vibrator Allow Jog Maximum Number of Jogs Jog Weight Jog Settle Time Jog Time Jog Time Override 0 00 Sec Jog Time Adjust 0 01 Sec INPUTS OUTPUTS 20 20 00 1b 1 00 Sec 0 47 Sec Bins Screen Page 2 Mixer 1 Bins Page 2 Flow Control Enabled E Time between Flow Calculations 1 50 Maximum Flow Rate 0 00 Minimum Flow Rate 0
222. m to Fast Feed value See Feed Types for more information about the Safe Target Extra Gate Shutoff The point at which all gates except the main gate are closed to avoid overshooting the target During Fast Feed all gates on all bins containing the material being fed are opened When the scale weight equals Target Extra Gate Shutoff Preact Plant Erraticness all gates are closed Fast Batch Tolerance All batches of a multi batch load except for the last batch use the larger of this value and of the absolute and percentage tolerances from the Ingredients screen The last batch uses only the tolerances from the Ingredients screen TIMED FEED Allow Timed Feed Yes No field that allows prevents timed feed Maximum Number of Maximum number of timed feeds the system can attempt Timed Feeds on one batch Plant Erraticness This value takes into account variations in accuracy for or lb Timed Feed calculations If both a percentage and an amount Ib are entered the system uses the greater of the two Minimum to Time Feed If Timed Feed is enabled and the amount left to feed is greater than the Minimum to Time Feed value the system searches the previous Drop History for buckets within or 20 of the amount left to feed and calculates a time duration to open the gate based on the found information A bucket is a weight range of previous drop records used for ca
223. mber will appear in this field See Device Property Sets for more information Destination The destination device for this feed relationship See examples for Source above Trace Yes No field that sets whether debugging tracepoints are activated for this feed relationship Defaults to No Command Alkon personnel should only change this field 02 09 10 108 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 FUNCTION KEYS F1 Save To save data you have entered or changed Note Changes to property set records will not become effective until the Feed Destinations screen 1s saved F2 Browse To pull up a list of possible entries Browseable fields have these brackets F3 More To drill down to the selected device s edit screen This drill down feature is available for source destination and property set devices Note This key is disabled if the Feed Destinations screen was accessed from a device edit screen F4 P_Set To create delete a property set device A property set is created if none exists If a property set exists the system asks you if the property set is to the deleted F5 Ins Ln Inserts a blank row above the current row F6 Del Ln Deletes the current row Note When you delete a line from a device edit screen the actual record is not deleted until you save the Feed Destinations screen F7 Clear Clears the cu
224. n silo etc and its current on hand amount FUNCTION KEYS FUNCTION KEY F3 Incoming Pulls up the Incoming Inventory box so you can receive incoming inventory F4 Convert Displays inventory in the alternate units of measure Press this key again to return to the original units of measure F5 Detail Pulls up the DETAILED USAGE By PLANT screen F6 Sys Ttl total ingredient usage for all plants for the selected inventory period F7 Reset Causes the On Hand amounts of all mix design ingredients Pulls up the USAGE BY MATERIAL screen which shows to be reset to zero balances NGREDI ENT I NVENTORY LEVELS ALL PLANTS To view ingredient inventory for all plants 1 Select MAIN MENU REPORTS INGREDIENT LISTING and press ENTER 2 The inventory list is sent to the printer or to a file if this was specified on the PLANTS screen 02 09 10 160 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 NGREDI ENT USAGE DATA SINGLE PLANT To view ingredient usage data for a single plant 1 02 09 10 NOTE This list includes ingredients manually batched To view a log of manually batched ingredients only select MAIN MENU REPORTS MANUAL MATERIAL MONITOR then select the date s Select MAIN MENU gt DATA ENTRY UPDATE INVENTORY A sub menu appears giving you the option of choosing one of the following views Daily Inventory Weekly In
225. n we will discuss the screens used for entering orders and for preparing and running batches Our discussion will follow a logical workflow starting with a discussion of the ORDER INDEX and LOAD INDEX screens and ending with running batches on the GRAPH screen ORDER I NDEX AND LOAD I NDEX SCREENS These screens function the same in that they allow you to select an order and transfer it to the BATCH SETUP screen where you can prepare it for batching They are different in that the ORDER INDEX lists orders that were entered locally on the Spectrum while the LOAD INDEX screen lists orders downloaded from a Dispatch System Another difference is that on the ORDER INDEX you can make some changes to the orders on the index You cannot make any changes to orders listed on the LOAD INDEX An example of each screen is shown next Each example is followed by a description of its fields and functions keys Order Index Order Date Il Firm Will Call 150 00 Firm Orders 150 00 02 09 10 175 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 mw FIELDS ORDER I NDEX Information that appears on this screen is pulled from the Order Entry screen Each field on this screen except for Mix Code and Delivered Amount is editable Changes made to these fields also change the order record DESCRIPTION Order Date Contains the date for which orders are being displayed Only one date can be displayed Browse this field to select a different dat
226. n be viewed and modified See Adjusting Batch Information F9 RUN Causes the batch on this screen to start weighing up NOTE Although this function can be accessed from any screen in the Spectrum System it is highly recommended that you run batches from the BATCH SETUP screen only This way you can ensure you are F8 Moisture Takes you to the MOISTURES screen where moisture batching the correct order F10 HOLD Causes the batch that is currently running to hold or suspend This function can be accessed from any screen in the Spectrum System F11 DISCHARGE Causes the load currently weighing up to discharge This function can be accessed from any screen in the Spectrum System F12 GRAPH Displays the GRAPH screen that shows the progress of weigh up and discharge This function can be accessed from any screen in the Spectrum System re ADJUSTING BATCH NFORMATION As you can tell from the field descriptions given earlier most of the information on the BATCH SETUP screen can be changed before a batch is run Some of this information is very critical to the strength and make up of the concrete For this reason further explanation is given in the next few sub sections We will first discuss changing target weights followed by changes that affect the water target only and ending with changing the discharge rate into a truck gt CHANGING TARGET WEIGHTS You can change the target amount
227. nce 65 8 Number of data bytes following 0 n1 Bar Code Type Selection 1 n2 0 n3 Vertical Height of the bar code 3 n4 1 n5 Width of one barcode character 0 7 1 n6 Ignored for EAN8 1 n7 Wide to Narrow ratio settings 0 7 2 n8 Print quality of plain writing w PRINT BAR CODE ESCAPE SEQUENCE Enter the following sequence between a set of lt L gt lt L gt delimiters on the Ticket Layout Editor to tell the printer to print bar codes Bytecode Use 27 16 Print Barcode escape sequence 66 8 Number of data bytes following mw TICKET LAYOUT EDITOR ENTRIES The following example shows all of the entries needed on the Ticket Layout Editor for printing the bar coded ticket number Action Column 67 67 67 67 02 09 10 ta Instance Format lt L gt 27 16 65 80103111 2 lt L gt lt L gt 27 16 66 8 lt L gt Ticket_Number 149 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 CONFIGURING A PRINTER After you have set up your ticket format and script you are ready to connect the printer and configure it To SET UP A PRINTER 1 Connect the printer to the appropriate port usually the first parallel port on the Spectrum computer Plug the power cord into the appropriate electrical outlet 2 Select MAIN MENU SYSTEM MAINTENANCE PORT PARAMETERS The screen shown below appears Port Parameter for a Printer Parameter Name P
228. nce is set at 20 pounds Target weight is 100 pounds The scale registers a 30 pound positive tare For a Y value the system dumps 70 pounds of material onto the scale For an N value the system dumps 100 pounds of material onto the scale Use Negative Tare Works in conjunction with the Zero Tolerance Under field on the SCALES screen If you enter a Y in this field the system accepts any negative tare amount under the established tolerance If you enter an N in this field the system always uses a zero value even if a negative weight exists Example Tolerance is set at 20 pounds Target weight is 100 pounds The scale registers a 15 pound negative tare For a Y value the system dumps 115 pounds of material onto the scale For an N value the system dumps 100 pounds of material onto the scale Use Under Negative Tare Works in conjunction with the Zero Tolerance Under field on the SCALES screen If you enter a Y in this field the system accepts any negative tare amount under the established tolerance If you enter an N in this field the system always uses a zero value even if a negative weight exists Example Tolerance is set at 20 pounds Target weight is 100 pounds The scale registers a 30 pound negative tare For a Y value the system dumps 130 pounds of material onto the scale For an N value the system dumps 100 pounds of material onto the scale 02 09 10 38 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24
229. nd locate the icon name for the USB device it might be labeled Removable Disk 3 Right Click on the USB device icon name and select Format The Format window is displayed 02 09 10 293 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 leg Format KINGSTON F Capacity 953 MB Y File system FAT Mj Allocation unit size Default allocation size v Volume label KINGSTON Format options C Quick Format 4 Make sure that the File System entry is set to FAT Note A USB device formatted under Windows must be formatted using the FAT File System to produce a T6 partition type that QNX supports 5 Click Start 6 When formatting is finished close and safely remove the USB device The USB device now contains a 100 MB DOS partition The remainder of the storage space on the device is the QNX partition 02 09 10 294 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 MPORT DATA FILES This utility lets you import data files from a floppy disk It is typically used for importing mix designs Up to ten data files can be imported For each file you must enter the name of the file and the name of the Spectrum initialization file see the sample screen below Import Data Files Node Number 1 Disk Drive ff Preprocessed commands are done serially Exec Prep Command Import Import File Import Format File Prep Cmd File gt 1 2 3 A 9 6 7 8 9 0 J Note The in the f
230. ng a discount You may do both Press F1 to save the record Repeat the process for each product for which you wish to set adjust pricing CONSISTENCE AND ExT DESCRIPTION The Consistence and Ext Desc Fields on the Discount screen accessed by pressing F5 describe concrete production in terminology required by the EN 206 Standards This information defaults in from the Mix Design record To edit or change EN 206 information 1 02 09 10 Access or create the project Add a mix to the project or select the one you want to edit 2 3 Press F5 Discount The Discount Pricing window appears 4 5 Edit the Consistence and Ext Desc fields as needed Press F1 to save the record 68 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 EDIT MMM DESCRIPTION This function lets you add descriptions or comments to the Manual Material Event Log which is a record of all materials manually batched You can also tell the system not to deduct the manually batched material from inventory To do this set Deduct amount from inventory to N To access the MANUAL MATERIAL MONITOR EVENT LOG DESCRIPTION EDITOR 1 Select MAIN MENU DATA ENTRY EDIT MMM DESCRIPTION The following screen appears with the cursor on the Event Date field Manual Material Event Log Description Editor Event Date Event ID Event Time Load ID Amount Material Device User Plant Deduct amount from inventory Editing User Edit Date and
231. ngredient for which you need to receive inventory 163 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 FUNCTION KEYS F1 Save Saves changes and returns you to the Daily Inventory screen F3 Ingredients Takes you to the INGREDIENTS screen F4 Incoming Log Pulls up a log of each adjustment made to inventory amounts F7 Reset Causes the On Hand amount of the currently selected ingredient to be reset to a zero balance CLEARING I NVENTORY The recommended way to clear inventory is to run the End of Day procedure The Clear and Reset Inventory field of the End of setup screens must be set to Y however See End of Day Procedures for more information An alternate way to clear inventory is to press F7 from the ON HAND LEVELS By PLANT screen enter Y for the appropriate inventory period s and press F1 This method can be used if you clear inventory more than once a day 02 09 10 164 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 SETTING UP USER ACCOUNTS The USER SETUP screen is used to add new users and to set passwords Only users with proper permissions can access this screen see User Security Other uses for this screen include setting the display colors for dispatched orders and load statuses and setting other times and flags for dispatched orders User Setup Screen ch on Receipt a on t Loading on error Sort Orde dex By Order Co
232. ngth of time in seconds the valve on the hose must stay open after the bottle is empty to allow all fluid to drain from the hose NOTE Prevents lines from freezing in cold weather Start Delay Length of time in seconds the system waits before starting discharge from this admixture bottle Hold Discharge Browseable field of I O points for the bottle hold limit switch Automatically shuts the valve if a problem is detected by the system Bottle Empty Browseable list of I O points for the Bottle Empty input Bottle Full Browseable list of I O points for the Bottle Full input Discharge Browseable field of I O points for the bottle discharge output 02 09 10 97 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 HOLDING TANKS If holding tanks are used e g for water you should set them up on the HOLDING TANKS screen This should be done before you assign feed destinations to each device As with many Spectrum screens you can go directly to other related screens from this one For instance you can press F4 to go to the I O Assignments screen F5 to go to the Metered Liquids screen or F6 to go to the Feed Destinations screen Capacity Unit Keyboard Hold Allow Early Feed Display Group Discharge Time Start Delay Holding Tanks Screen Hold Discharge Tank Empty Tank Full Seconds Discharge Seconds Hold Source Feeds Initial Charge Done Final Charg
233. nition 14 Selecting a Field 22 Flow Control Dampening 91 Formatting a Disk 292 Freewheeling 223 G Graph Screen 207 H Holding Tanks Screen 98 Hundred Weight Ingredients 44 I Ice Corrections Based On 130 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 Import Data Files 295 Ingredient Groups 42 Ingredients Screen 35 Inventory Clearing 164 Ingredient Inventory for All Plants 160 Ingredient Inventory for Single Plant 159 Ingredient Usage for All Plants 162 Ingredient Usage for Single Plant 161 Overview 158 Recording Incoming 163 Single Resale Product 59 Usage for All Mix Designs 52 J Jog Feed 82 171 L Load Index Changing Order of Loads 178 Load Index Screen 178 M Manual Station Labels 131 Material Assignments 104 Material Calculation Types 126 Material Calculations Screen 123 Material Overview Activating Deactivating a Device 231 Changing Feed amp Discharge Parameters 231 Reassigning Materials 230 Material Overview Screen 229 Menu Structure 25 Metered Liquids Screen 93 Mix Designs Screen 45 Mixer Operation 233 Mixers Screen 234 Motion Detection 89 Multi Batch Printing 146 Multi Batching 172 222 N Navigating the System 21 New Features 15 Node 14 O Order Entry To Change Order Pricing 186 187 To Change Order Times 185 To Copy an Order 187 To Edit an Order 184 To Enter an Order 184 Order Entry Screen 180 ORDER INDEX SCREEN
234. ns ERN 242 INCOMING INVENTORY REPORT iii e AEE ce cos EEE SE EE EEO ENEE aas 243 MATERIAL USAGE BY MATERIAL aiae n e r N A E AKE A AN A OE SEAS ENEE Naa 244 MATERIAL USAGE BY PLANT a a E A EE NS E a 245 MATERIAL USAGEBY BIN ESEE E A E EE EE E E T 246 MIXCINVENTOR Y AE E EE E E A E EE E SE A E EEE E 247 RESALE PRODUCT INVENTORY ads 248 AVERAGE MOISTURE REPORT e a E Ea E E rE A ET 249 INGREDIENT LISTING r ne a a 250 MTX DESIGN OTN G alias 251 MIX DESIGN SUMMAR Vo oie 252 CUSTOMER LISTING 0 a a A a a a r a A A EEE 253 CURRENT ORDERS nt A Oke a E 254 ALL ORDERS oia ld a cie 255 SELECT ORDER DATES diia 256 LOADS BORDER IO EAT 257 ORDERS BY PIEANT OEREO tia ita a tidad tia 258 PROJECR LISTING eau 259 PROJECTS BY CUSTOMER iaa 260 EXPIRED PROJECTS ii eat 261 PROJECTS BY LASTUSEDIDATE Coin e sted Rae EUR Meee ess 262 RESALE PRODUCTS LAISTINC siintaicch ves devseacebss cov dis 263 COD ETICKETS A A LO aora CMA Tee 264 N OIDED SLIGKETS a A Peg weg EA a PE ERA 265 TICKETS BY CUSTOMER iii siii 266 MATERIA E COSTS a A A oi 267 FEEETUTICIZATION soto dt dde didas dues 268 TRUCK PRODUCTION REPORT cccccssssscececececsesssaececececsesnsaececececseneaaececececeeneaasaesecececsesuaaeceeceeceessaaeaeeess 269 MANUAL MATERIAL MONITOR ccccesesssseccecececeesseaececececsessaaececececeesenseseceeececsesaaeceeeeeeseneaaeceeeeeeeenenaees 270 SEQUENCE LISTING dias 271 End ot Day Procedures da A CATEGORIES o a A a Roo ait oS 272 SELECTING W
235. ns because Group 2 materials make the corrections e Ingredients in Group 2 must have a Batch Calculation Type of N to allow the Group 2 material water slurry water etc to correct for errors in the weigh up of Ice e Group 2 materials must not complete their feeds before ALL Group 1 materials have finished feeding Depending on the system configuration it might be necessary to add a Holdback sequence for the Group 2 materials 02 09 10 130 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 CREATING MANUAL STATION LABELS 1 Select MAIN MENUSYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL STATION LABELS The following selection box appears Left Buttons A amp B Right Buttons C amp D Left Scales Right Scales 2 Select the set of labels you want to print or edit and press ENTER A screen with blank label blocks appears for that set of labels 3 You can create new labels or edit the default ones which will appear if you select Manual Station 1 1 2 in the Name field In either case use the arrow TAB or ENTER keys to move to a label block then enter text for that label 4 After you have entered edited all labels for this part of the Manual Station press F1 to save your changes 5 Ensure that the printer is turned on and that the paper tear off is just above the print head Set the print quality to NLQ and the character pitch to 10 Make sure the printer is in IBM emulation mode not Epson emulation mode
236. nt of the scale capacity and another set is used if the target weight is under 30 percent of the scale capacity Batch Size Round By A field for entering a round by factor for batch 6 19B Factor sizes has been added to page 2 of the Batching Defaults screen New York State requirement Final MnDOT Changes You can now print MnDOT standard column 6 19B headers on the batch weights portion of tickets by selecting this option on the Batch Weights Options screen Extra Devices Now Extra devices with temper external interfaces are 6 19B Displayed on Graphics now displayed on the Graphics Readout Display Screen and Scale Meter I O screens New fields were also added to the Extra Devices Screen Specific Gravity can now You can now select this option on the Batch 6 19B be printed with Batch Weight Options screen so that the specific gravity Weights percentage for gray water systems can be printed User Security not needed Users who do not have access to the Plant Setup 6 19B to Print Event Log menu can now print the Event Log from the Readout Display screen which can be accessed from the Reports menu or by pressing lt F3 gt from the Batch Setup screen Effectiveness Field now This field on the Ingredients screen now allows 6 19B has 2 Decimal Places two decimal places EN 206 Changes Two new fields have been added to some 6 20A Spectrum screens to describe concrete production in terminology required by the EN 206 Standards
237. nt the scale is allowed to read above zero and still be within its zero tolerance range Zero Tolerance Under Amount the scale is allowed to read below zero and still be within its zero tolerance range Turn Vibrator On Scale weight at which the vibrator is turned on during discharge Gate Wide Open Scale weight at which the gate is opened all the way to completely empty the scale Hold Empty Scale Length of time in seconds the gate should be help open Open even after the scale weight reads zero to allow the last bits of material to fall out of the scale Scale Settle Time Length of time in seconds the system should wait before checking the weight on the scale This is because the scale tends to bounce up and down after being loaded Accurate readings cannot be obtained until the scale is allowed to settle Max Gate Close Time Duration of the gate close output pulse Gate Close Forced Yes No field Forces gate closed before feeding starts If Yes the gate close time must always expire before the scale will be used Start Delay Number of seconds to wait before feeding or discharging actually starts Inputs Hold Disch VO point for the HOLD button on the manual station Gate Closed T O point for the limit switch on the gate that indicates when the gate is closed Outputs Gate Open T O point for the signal the computer sends to open the gate Gate Close 1 O point for the signal t
238. ntory Browseable list of mix classes Mix classes are entered on the MIx CLASSES screen found in the SYSTEM MAINTENANCE menu and are used when returned concrete is involved Here s how it works Compatible mix designs are assigned to a particular mix class By compatible we mean a small amount of one mix design could be left in the truck and combined with another mix design of the same class with no adverse affects The QC department usually defines Mix classes Only a couple of U S states allow returned concrete to be resold Allows you to indicate whether this mix should be tracked in the daily inventory logging If set to N mix design inventory will not be kept for this mix and it will not affect the daily totals for batches run A ticket will not be printed for no value loads Usually used for washout mix designs Taxable Indicates whether this mix design is taxable List Price Per unit price for the mix design Account Number Used for tracking purposes 02 09 10 47 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 Alias DESCRIPTION Used only when Spectrum is interfaced to a HydroControl IV moisture control system In this case you would enter the 3 character alias for the mix in this field Slump Table Browseable list of slump tables that can be attached to the mix design If a slump table is selected here then standard linear slump calculations will not be used See Sl
239. ntrol Browseable field Type of handshaking used by the device S for XOn Xoff software handshaking H for RTS CTS hardware handshaking NOTE RTS CTS means Ready To Send Clear To Send Line Type Browseable field P for a direct connection or D for a dial up connection phone line Multi Drop Yes No field that indicates whether the plant has dedicated phone lines for data transfer that are specially installed by the phone company and that do not require any dialing but connect automatically upon being used A CAS switch is very useful with this type of phone line Hex Convert Yes No field Used only with the Boral link and sets whether transmissions are converted from ASCII codes to hexadecimal numbers Example Instead of a one byte A character a two byte hex number 41 is transmitted Bin Cre Yes No field Sets whether the CRC is in binary form For example if the CRC for a message is 254 then 254 is assigned to the one CRC byte otherwise the CRC would be in an ASCII hexadecimal format in two bytes This option can only be used if the serial port modem connection has hardware flow control enabled It will cause a software flow controlled connection to fail because the CRC may then take a value that is the same as XON or XOFF No Cre Yes No field Sets whether CRC calculations or tests are performed for a transmission Reversed Cre Yes No field Sets w
240. o the Sub Totals area so all Sub Totals can later be added to obtain a Grand Total 4 Repeat Steps 2 and 3 above for each rectangular shape 5 Write the Grand Total on paper so you can enter it when you go back to the ORDER ENTRY screen w TO CALCULATE CYLINDRICAL SHAPES 1 Access the Concrete Calculator as described on the previous page 2 Press F1 to pull up the Concrete Calculator for cylindrical shapes You can also press this key to go back to the calculator for rectangular shapes 3 Enter measurements for the Diameter and Height Press ENTER after each entry After you press ENTER for the Height the system calculates the Total Write this amount on paper so you can enter it when you go back to the ORDER ENTRY screen 4 If you need to calculate other cylindrical shapes for this order press F5 after you have entered the Height for the first shape This inserts the Total into the Sub Totals area so all Sub Totals can later be added to obtain a Grand Total 5 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 above for each cylindrical shape 6 Write the Grand Total on paper so you can enter it when you go back to the ORDER ENTRY screen 02 09 10 190 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 BATCH SETUP SCREEN Loads are prepared for batching on the BATCH SETUP screen On this screen you can change target weights for ingredients not locked by mix design or material You can adjust water volume Slump In Truck and Trim fields
241. o just before the Advanced Batching Features section October 12 2001 e Updated field descriptions for Ingredients screen e Replaced old disclaimer page with the new one October 15 2001 Updated field descriptions for Batch Weights reports according to new oven dry moisture calculation changes October 16 2001 Added sections on Material Calculations screen and Slurry Calculations February 27 2002 e Added section on setting up the printer and updated description of Tracepoints field of Port Parameters screen e Updated description of Record SOZ as Batched field of Ingredients screen March 1 2002 e Updated description of Tracepoints field of Ingredients screen e Updated descriptions of items on Batch Weights reports April 4 2002 Added sections on Editing Truck Code Before Discharge and Editing Truck Code After Discharge to the Adjusting Batching Information section August 19 2003 to September 30 2003 Updated the user guide for V6 19 Consolidated the U S and Metric user guides into one Note The U K switch_date script is now incorporated into the general release The script file makes the required profile and 02 09 10 11 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 message file modifications then recompiles the msgfile bin file Backup files are created as before April 5 2004 Updated user guide for V6 20A
242. o make one unit cubic yard or cubic meter of the admix design Based On Amount of this ingredient required to make one unit based on the amount of another ingredient The ingredient must have based on information entered on the INGREDIENTS screen Actual targets are figured at batch time based on the setups in the MATERIAL CALCULATIONS screen 02 09 10 53 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 DESCRIPTION Sale Unit This field is not editable It contains the default batching unit of measure for your system You can press F4 to toggle between U S Standard and Metric measurements Quantity Type Default quantity to be targeted when a load with this admix design is batched The options are B balance causes the product quantity to be set to zero when quantity ordered quantity delivered F flat rate causes the product quantity to be automatically set to 1 on the Batch Setup screen M mix based causes the quantity of the admix to match the quantity of the main mix design on the Batch Setup screen Taxable Indicates whether this admix design is taxable List Price Per unit price for the admix design Account Number Used for tracking purposes Last Modified Read only fields that show the last date the record was by modified and by which user FUNCTION KEYS FUNCTION KEY F1 Save F2 Browse Saves data you have entered or changed
243. o the printer Log of Manually Batched Ingredients 02 09 10 Select MAIN MENU REPORTS MANUAL MATERIAL MONITOR 158 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 NGREDI ENT I NVENTORY LEVELS SINGLE PLANT To view ingredient inventory levels for a single plant 1 Select MAIN MENU gt DATA ENTRY UPDATE INVENTORY A sub menu appears giving you the option of choosing one of the following views Daily Inventory Weekly Inventory Monthly Inventory or Yearly Inventory 2 Select the desired view The ON HAND LEVELS BY PLANT screen shown next is displayed In the example below the weekly view is selected All views contain the same type of information except for the total amount batched On Hand Levels By Plant Date and Time Last Cleared Plant 91 Total Batched JLLLLLLLLL LLLLLLLLLI JLLLLLLLLLL LLL 3 Ifyou need to look at inventory for another plant press F2 from the Plant field to pull up a browse list select the desired plant and press ENTER 02 09 10 159 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 FIELDS e The Date and Time Last Cleared field shows when the inventory levels were last cleared and updated see Clearing Inventory e The Total Batched field shows the total yards batched by the plant for the selected period daily weekly monthly or yearly The Ingredient Location and On Hand fields are self explanatory They show the ingredient its location bi
244. oad Index Editing Demand Plant Batching 02 09 10 Load Index Screen Projects Screens Mini Dispatch Mix and Admix Design Screens Orders amp Tickets Resale Products Screen System Defaults amp User Screens User Login Screen Allow User to Start Batch with RUN Allow Batch from Yesterday s Orders Allow RUN From All Screens End of Day Screen amp Utility Menu Node 1 Only Batchbook Base and Cement Screens 169 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 BATCHING OPERATIONS NTRODUCTION Batching consists of two parts The first part is the Batching Cycle where materials are weighed or metered into scales holding hoppers or bottles The second part is the Discharge Cycle where the scales and holding hoppers or bottles are discharged into a truck or mixer and where direct metered admixes and water are normally added We will start with a general discussion of these two cycles including some of the technical terms used in concrete batching Next we will briefly discuss how to run an automatic batch For a discussion of manual batching see the E Z Cal User s Manual Then we will discuss the screens used in the batching process ORDER ENTRY LOAD INDEX ORDER INDEX BATCH SETUP and GRAPH Most of the details about batching order entry calculating dimensions adjusting batch information etc are contained in the discussions of these screens BATCHING CYCLE All materials for each scale or mete
245. of loading the truck or mixer to get the material flowing Close2 Time at Start Duration of the gate close output pulse Open2 Adjust Pulse Length of time in seconds the gate opens to keep the material flow rate constant Close2 Adjust Pulse Length of time in seconds the gate closes to keep the material flow rate constant 02 09 10 88 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 MOTION DETECTION re SETUP Motion Detection ensures that a scale s reading is stable before its value is recorded Motion Detection is used in the following situations e To capture the scale s Start Tare before the first material is fed into the scale e To record correct Batch Weights after the scale s Settle delay and before the Tolerance Check on the batched material e To capture the scale s End Tare after the scale s discharge cycle is complete To enable Motion Detection 1 Open the Scale Meter I O screen From the Main Menu select Plant Setup gt Calibration amp Test gt Scale Meter I O 2 In the Motion Range field enter the number of scale movement graduations that correspond to an in motion condition Note A value of zero in the Motion Range field disables motion checking _ id E e to id a ae i o a i ce et a a ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee anu 0000000000 DD 00000 00 00000000 Sh F4 to print event log me OPERATION When a batch is run if the scale s flow rate is within the sp
246. one particular customer When you add a customer you are adding another record to the Customer database table WHAT IS THE PURPOSE OF THE DATABASE Essential business related information such as customer names mix designs materials trucks and drivers is entered into and maintained in the Spectrum database This data can then be inserted into other Spectrum screens e g the ORDERS or PROJECTS screens so the same information does not have to be re typed each time it is needed The database is also used to maintain inventory records When materials are added or used the amounts are either added to or deducted from current amounts stored in the database Database information is automatically saved on the hard drive However it should also be backed up on either on floppy disk or USB removable device through the Spectrum s Disk Utilities function For added security printed copies should also be made Most of the information stored in the Spectrum database is accessible through DATA ENTRY screens which are accessed through the DATA ENTRY MENU shown next DATA ENTRY screens are discussed in this section However they are not discussed in the order they appear on the menu Rather they are discussed in the order in which they should be set up For example Customers are discussed before Orders because customer information is used for order entry 02 09 10 29 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 To ADD A DATABASE TABLE RE
247. one selected can be used on the Graph screen to hold this device Allow Early Feed Yes No field enables disables freewheeling for this device 02 09 10 102 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 Pulse Mode DESCRIPTION Running mode of this device Choices are Y means the system sends a pulse to start the device then another pulse to stop 1t Use this for double action solenoids N means the system sends a continuous signal to start the device and keep it running When the system stops sending the signal the device stops running Use this for single action solenoids Ignore Hold Y means this device ignores hold signals from the operator Prevents belts and diverters from becoming jammed if they stop moving Repeat Pulse Yes No field that allows disallows the pulse attribute to repeat Ex This allows a beeper function to be created Start Delay Length of time in seconds the system waits before starting the device Pulse Time Duration of the pulse in seconds that the system sends to move the device In the case of a diverter a pulse moves the diverter from one position to another A second pulse moves the diverter back to its original position Clear Time Length of time in seconds the device remains in place or stays on after the load is completed In the case of a diverter this allows all material to be cleared from the diverter Start Limit
248. ot print until the truck code is verified To use this method 1 Go to SYSTEM MAINTENANCE PRINTER SETUP and select the appropriate Node Number Add the F argument to the script in the Ticket Script Name s field as shown next Printer Setup Screen with F argument Node Number Default Login User Code Record Batch Weights to Disk Print Top Half of Ticket Record Log Ticket Page Length Ticket Page Hidth Ticket Script Name s Set EPSON mode Press F1 to save your data Then the system will always prompt you with the following message when you try to run a batch even if you have already entered a truck code on the Batch Setup screen Truck Code Message Truck code must be verified before Ticket_ID 536 will print Ref Load_ID 651 Press lt Alt A gt to bring up Truck Assignment screen F to clear this Warning 202 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 Note Exactly when this message appears depends on when tickets were set up to print in the Ticket Script Name s field of the Printer Setup screen By default tickets start to print at LOAD START meaning this warning message would pop up as soon as you pressed F9 to start the batch 5 Press F4 to clear the message then press ALT A to pull up the Assign Truck Code dialog 6 Arrow up or down to select the correct ticket Press F2 and select a truck code The driver name is pulled in when you select the truck cod
249. otherwise the borders will not print correctly 6 Press F4 to print the labels for this part of the Manual Station 7 Cut the labels along the lines provided on the printout 8 Insert the label into the small slot on the edge of the Manual Station overlay Widths of the slots can vary slightly so you may need to trim some labels 9 Repeat Steps 2 through 8 for the other parts of the Manual Station panel NOTES Pressing F8 deletes all labels for this part of the panel Make sure this is what you want to do before proceeding Pressing F7 clears the text from all labels on the screen Again make sure this is what you want to do 02 09 10 131 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 CREATING TICKET LAYOUTS SCRIPTS This section explains how you can change the format and content of printed tickets We start with a description of the TICKET LAYOUT EDITOR screen followed by a description of the Ticket Alias File Then we give the general procedures for creating and editing ticket scripts THE TICKET LAYOUT EDITOR SCREEN Ticket scripts are created and modified on this screen A ticket script controls what is printed on a load ticket as well as where it is printed You must understand how to use the TICKET LAYOUT EDITOR before you begin creating or editing ticket scripts The TICKET LAYOUT EDITOR screen is accessed by selecting MAIN MENU SYSTEM MAINTENANCE TICKET LAYOUT EDITOR When this scre
250. ou can change the truck code BEFORE a batch discharges These methods are listed here and discussed immediately after that e By pressing ALT A to pull up the Assign Truck Code dialog before the ticket starts to print By default tickets are set to start printing at LOAD START but this flag can be changed in the Ticket Script Name s field of the Printer Setup screen e By entering the T argument in the Ticket Script Name s field of the Printer Setup screen so the system will prompt you for a truck code only if the Truck field of the Batch Setup screen is blank e By entering the F argument in the Ticket Script Name s field of the Printer Setup screen so the system will always prompt you for a truck code before it prints the ticket Note Once the load has discharged and the ticket has printed you will have to go to the Edit Ticket screen to change the truck code and or driver You cannot modify the truck discharge rate on this screen however Alt A To use this method 1 Press ALT A from any screen to pull up the Assign Truck Code dialog shown next Assign Truck Code Box Note A maximum of three tickets can be active at one time meaning no more than three tickets can appear on the Assign Truck Code dialog 2 Enter the truck code and driver or edit the existing ones for the selected ticket 3 Make sure Y is selected in the Verified column for the selected ticket 4 Press F1 to save the inform
251. ou want to create the same mix design in the alternate unit of measure Note The system still batches the mix in the original units F5 Insert Inserts a line in the Ingredients section The new line is inserted above the line currently selected 02 09 10 48 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 F6 Del Line Deletes a line in the Ingredients section The line currently selected is deleted F7 Clear Cancels changes before you have saved them F8 Delete Deletes the mix design currently displayed When prompted press this key again to confirm 02 09 10 49 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 To CREATE A MIX DESIGN 1 Access the MIX DESIGNS screen 2 In the Mix Code field type the code for the mix design you are creating 3 Press ENTER to move to the Description field and type the full name of the mix design 4 Press ENTER to move to the Ingredients section NOTE Before adding ingredients you must determine the order in which ingredients are to be batched for this mix The system batches ingredients in the order they are listed on the MIX DESIGNS screen from top to bottom Ingredients should be listed in the following order in a mix design 1 Aggregates 2 Cement 3 Water 4 Admixes 5 Type the code for the first ingredient on the top line of the Ingredients section You can browse a list of ingredients by pressing F2 Then highlight the desire
252. out a specific item in a database table A table can have many records For example the information stored for one customer is a record Records are composed from information stored in fields Records are viewed created and modified using DATA ENTRY screens Y FIELD All data is entered into fields Each time you view a Spectrum screen you are looking at an assortment of fields Think of a screen as a form with fields as blanks where you enter data Each field contains a particular type of data e g Customer Name Unit Price Project Number etc NODES TERMINALS All IBM PC compatible computers are called Nodes Attached serial terminals are referred to as Terminals Y CHARACTER The term character refers to a single letter symbol or digit For example A and 2 are each a single character In contrast the number 100 is three characters long Each field consists of a certain number of characters 02 09 10 14 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 NEW FEATURES The following features have been added to the Spectrum software since Version 6 18 The current software version is 6 23 Note Information about feature enhancements is provided in the Release Notes for the appropriate Spectrum version A D PIPTIO Multi Tier Tolerances You can now enter tolerances for small loads Per 6 19B ASTM guidelines once set of tolerances is used if the target weight is over 30 perce
253. p shown in the following screen example is displayed so that the operator can take action the same way he would for manual bin switching 02 09 10 106 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 Runs 1 Load s 0 t TICKET PRINTING FOR SWITCHED BINS e If an alternate bin was used a is printed beside the material s Actual amount on the ticket e Ifa substitute material was used a is printed beside the material s Actual amount on the ticket e If material was fed from two different bins and both bins have a moisture probe moisture values are weighted for the proportion of each material 02 09 10 107 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 SETTING FEED DESTINATIONS FEED DESTINATIONS SCREEN After configuring devices bins and silos scales bottles mixers trucks etc you can assign feed destinations to each device This is done on the FEED DESTINATIONS screen shown next Feed Destinations Screen Plant Name fll LLLLLLLLLL LLLLLLLLLL LLLLLLLLLL FIELDS DESCRIPTION Plant Name Browseable field containing list of available plants Source The source device for this feed relationship Examples A bin can feed into a scale a scale can feed into a truck mixer or holding hopper an admix can feed into a bottle mixer or a truck a bottle can feed into a mixer or a truck Property Set If a property set record has been created for the source device the PSET nu
254. pears This screen shows the progress of weigh up by ingredient at the top of the screen by scale at the bottom See The Graph Screen section for details Also the top portion of the ticket is normally printed at this time NOTE If tolerance errors occur during weigh up a red error window pops up You can choose to accept the error by pressing F4 retry feeding by pressing F6 or you can press the manual feed button until enough material is fed then press F6 Once the materials have weighed up and a truck is in place press F11 DISCH to start discharge The DISCH prompt at the top of the screen turns white while discharge is occurring You will see the colored bars at the bottom of the screen move from right to left to show the scales discharging Normally the remainder of the ticket batch weights are printed at this time When discharge is complete both the RUN and DISCH prompts at the top of the screen turn back to the normal black color Press F12 to return to the BATCH SETUP screen NOTE Ifthe Batch on Receipt feature is enabled a batch is automatically run each time a ticket is received The ticket can come from either the Spectrum or a communications link e g Link 2000 If multiple tickets are received the next batch freewheels 1 e when one device is empty it weighs up material for the next batch 174 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 SCREENS USED FOR AUTOMATIC BATCHING In this sectio
255. pens the gate all the way then closes it once loading is done Maximum Flow Rate Maximum flow rate allowed in scale units per second Minimum Flow Rate Minimum flow rate allowed in scale units per second Alt Bin After sec These fields work together If Bin Mapping is allowed Sec Flow Under lb sec the Batching Defaults screen the system uses the Alt Bin After and Sec Flow Under parameters to determine how many seconds to try a feed before switching to the alternate bin Vibrator On If Flow When the flow rate slows down to this rate the vibrator Below is activated Flow Start Delay Length of time in seconds the system waits after loading has begun to check the flow rate This is necessary because the flow rate is erratic at the start of a load Open Time at Start Length of time in seconds the gate should be opened at the start of the loading the truck or mixer to get the material flowing 02 09 10 86 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 FIELD DESCRIPTION Close Time at Start Duration of the gate close output pulse Open Adjust Pulse Length of time in seconds the gate opens to keep the material flow rate constant Close Adjust Pulse Length of time in seconds the gate closes to keep the material flow rate constant Scale Empty When the material left to discharge reaches this amount the scale is considered empty by the system Zero Tolerance Over Amou
256. r except for those that are metered directly into the truck or mixer are batched into their respective scales hoppers or bottles during the Batching Cycle To batch manually you must feed one material at a time To batch automatically however you can call up pre defined formulas then let the Spectrum System control feeding weigh up and discharge Scales and admix bottles should be empty Each scale should be within a range of true zero an amount between the Zero Tolerance Over and Zero Tolerance Under values set on the SCALES screen for that scale Zero Tolerance is not used for admixes Admix holding bottles normally send bottle empty signals back to the Spectrum System to indicate they are ready PREACT In a typical gravity fed batch plant the feeding of aggregate material is stopped at a point short of the target weight to compensate for airborne material that has not reached the scale This is referred to as Preact For example if the end target is 1000 pounds and 100 pounds of free fall material is anticipated the Preact value would be 100 The column of airborne material grows shorter as the pile in the scale grows taller meaning Preact is smaller for large batch sizes 02 09 10 170 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 Y FEED TYPES In general the system attempts first to Fast Feed then Time Feed and finally Jog Feed to arrive as close as possible to the requested Target During each feed type
257. r mixer to get the material flowing Close Time at Start Duration of the gate close output pulse Open Adjust Pulse Length of time in seconds the gate opens to keep the material flow rate constant Close Adjust Pulse Length of time in seconds the gate closes to keep the material flow rate constant Max Gate Close Time Duration of the gate close output pulse Gate Close Forced Yes No field Forces gate closed before feeding starts from this bin If Yes the gate close time must expire before the scale will be used Vibrator On If Flow When the flow rate slows down to this rate the vibrator Below 1s activated Serial Probe Port This field is used when a moisture probe is attached as an external serial device 02 09 10 80 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 FEED CONFIGURATIONS Bins and silos can be configured to feed at different rates based on the amount of material left to feed and other bin settings These feed configurations take advantage of Spectrum s feed types described next mw FEED TYPES In general the system attempts first to Fast Feed then Time Feed and finally Jog Feed to arrive as close as possible to the requested Target During each feed type the system makes calculations based on parameters and previously learned information for the feed type gt FAST FEED Before Fast Feed starts a Safe Target is calculated by adding the requested Target to t
258. r ready mix concrete company Spectrum offers you complete ready mix operations functionality including batching reporting quality control scheduling order tracking inventory dispatching and mix design maintenance management All aspects of the Spectrum System are linked through a central database Spectrum can also be linked to existing accounting or general ledger software Spectrum also offers you direct control of your concrete mixing and batching activities With Command Alkon s moisture probe you can generate an accurate reading of material moistures at any point in the batching process allowing you to accurately determine the amount of water necessary for the desired mix This Guide is designed to help you make the most of your new Spectrum System We re sure you ll find that working with Spectrum will lead to more efficient operation of your ready mix concrete company Ensuring the accuracy and speed of your batching processes will allow you to react quickly to changing conditions and improve your ability to respond to customer needs AUDIENCE This Guide is intended for the use of managers dispatchers and batch persons who operate ready mix concrete plants Additional technical material regarding the Spectrum System is available through Command Alkon Technical Support at 614 792 0677 REGULATORY COMPLI ANCE MN DOT CERTIFICATION Spectrum V6 19B and later produces a Certificate of Compliance concrete bat
259. r the percentage 02 09 10 amount on the Discount is line and press ENTER If you type a dollars 186 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 per unit amount the system calculates the percentage for you Similarly if you type a percentage the system calculates the dollars per unit In the example above we entered 5 percent The remainder of the pricing was automatically updated when we pressed ENTER or TAB To change the List Price type the desired list price over the existing list price in the List Price field under the Unit Price column Press ENTER or TAB The system calculates the remaining pricing information Press ESC to exit the Discount Pricing box Repeat Steps 3 7 for each product for which you wish to adjust pricing Before you exit the ORDER ENTRY screen be sure to press F1 to save your changes To edit or change EN 206 information The Consistence and Ext Desc Fields on the Discount screen accessed by pressing F5 describe concrete production in terminology required by the EN 206 Standards This information defaults in from the project record If no project is used it comes from the mix design record 1 2 Select MAIN MENU DATA ENTRY ORDERS Type or browse for the Order Code Press ENTER The order appears on the screen with the mix design and any resale products displayed at the bottom 3 Press F5 Discount The Discount Pricing window appears Edit the Consistence
260. rbo 9 Pin Size Alphanumeric EAN 8 Y Y 8 N EAN 13 Y Y 13 N UPC A Y Y 12 N UPC E Y N 6 N Code 39 Y Y 43 Y Code 128 Y Y 50 Y Interleaved 2 5 Y Y 50 N ZIP Code Y Y 9 N Code 39 prints the following character set 123456789A BCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ 2 Code 128 prints from one of three subsets A B C Refer to the printer manual for details EXAMPLE PRINTING A BAR CODE TICKET NUMBER The following example prints a bar coded ticket number starting at position 67 on the top part of the ticket All codes are shown in decimal values The following the ticket_number tells the printer to calculate and print the checksum value Note that the number of data bytes specified in the Print Bar Code escape sequence is eight This includes the 7 digit ticket number with required leading zeros and the sign Note If a bar code is required at the bottom of the ticket then the same sequence of characters can be output from within the vweights2 bwv_vw2 or other script Contact Command Alkon Support Services if you need this kind of functionality w BAR CODE ESCAPE SEQUENCE Enter the following sequence shown between a set of lt L gt lt L gt delimiters on the Ticket Layout Editor to tell Spectrum that bar codes are going to be printed 02 09 10 148 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 Bytecode Use 27 16 Select bar code escape seque
261. rial Applies to Mix Design Polynomials Refer to the Mix Design Polynomial document for details Min Applies to Mix Design Polynomials Refer to the Mix Design Polynomial document for details Max Applies to Mix Design Polynomials Refer to the Mix Design Polynomial document for details 02 09 10 117 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 FIELD DESCRIPTION Moisture Entry Type Used for moisture and absorption calculations Choices are S for SSD and D for Oven Dry Default Mix Entry Mix Type that appears by default when you create a new Type mix design Choices are S for SSD O for Oven Dry MnDOT and D for Oven Dry Note For Oven Dry MnDOT water is entered in the mix design as FREE water instead of as TOTAL water Round Batch Size By This factor is used for rounding batch sizes up or down so that they are evenly divisible by this factor By default this field is set to zero so that Spectrum will divide a large load into multiple batches of equal size When a value besides zero is entered in this field Spectrum rounds each batch of a multi batch load except for the last batch by this factor Ideally the load size should be evenly divisible by the round by factor Two examples are given next one for a load size evenly divisible by the round by factor and another for a load size that is not Example 1 Load Size evenly divisible by Round By Factor Load Size 6 2 m3 Batch Siz
262. riod NOTE To view a list of all resale products select MAIN MENU REPORTS gt RESALE PRODUCT LISTING and press ENTER The list is generated and sent to the printer or to a file if this was specified on the PLANTS screen A sample of this report is shown in the Reports section of this guide FUNCTION KEYS FUNCTION KEY F1 Save Saves data you have entered or changed F2 Browse Pulls up a list of possible entries Browseable fields have these brackets F3 Incoming the Incoming Inventory box so you can receive the product See Recording Incoming Inventory Resale Products for more information about receiving inventory F7 Clear Cancels changes before you have saved them F8 Delete Deletes the product record currently displayed When When a resale product is displayed press this key to pull up prompted press this key again to confirm 02 09 10 59 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 INGREDIENTS USED AS RESALE PRODUCTS For customers who use ingredients as resale products resale usage can be deducted from the corresponding ingredient s inventory when the ticket is generated In order for this feature to work e The Inventory Level field of the Ingredients screen must be set to Y By Plant or S System Wide for each ingredient used as a resale product e The Inventory Enable and Deduct from Ingredient fields of the Resale
263. rotocol D Tracepoints r 11 Flow Control S File or Device D Line Type File Path Name Multi Drop Serial Parallel Device Name RTS Delay CTS Delay Hex Convert Baud Rate Bin Cre Data Bits 8 No Cre Parity N Time Delay Reversed Crc Stop Bits 1 Dialing Retries No Limit Duplex F Connect Delay No Wait ACK DTR DSR Hangup Delay Init Format Modem Init Phone Number Hangup String Note The Port Parameters screen is also used for configuring other devices such as a Remote Scale Display or Water Controller 3 Using the example above and the field descriptions on the following pages configure the printer Normally this is done at the factory 02 09 10 150 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 FIELDS PORT PARAMETERS SCREEN FIELD DESCRIPTION Parameter Name Browseable field Name of the device to which you want to send information Useable Yes No field indicating whether this device can be used on the PLANTS screen Y is the default Node Node to which this device is connected 1 is the default File or Device Browseable field Enter either F for file or D for a port device such as a printer D is the default File Path Name Browseable field Path to file on the hard drive where information is to be sent You may enter your own file path or select a predefined one from the browse list Do not enter the Node number Default is bl
264. roup 1 First group in the row to have the calculation specified in the Type column run against it Group 2 Second group in the row to have the calculation specified in the Type column run against it Type Specifies the calculation to be performed on the group s listed in this row Only one type can be selected from the browse list See Material Calculation Types for an explanation of each calculation type Factor Calculation factor used for a particular calculation type Not all calculations use calculation factors For those that do the factor is pre determined by industry standards 02 09 10 124 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 Recalculate Target DESCRIPTION A Y entered here instructs the system to perform the calculation 10 times a second on the target amounts of materials in the specified group s This helps the system adjust for dynamic situations i e moisture fluctuations Note All Recalculate flags after the first Y on the Material Calculations screen are effectively forced to Y also For this reason groups that require recalculations i e Aggregate and Water should be listed near the end Trace A Y entered here turns on error tracing for the calculation listed in this row Comments This column is provided for you to enter any comments about a particular row of calculations FUNCTION KEYS FUNCTION KEY F
265. rrent screen Be careful about using this function F8 Position the cursor in Property Set column on the row containing the desired property set device and press F4 The system displays the following prompt Press F8 to delete Property Set PSETnn Esc to continue Press F8 to blank the field Note The actual property set record will not be deleted Works with the F4 key to delete a property set record until you save the Feed Destinations screen 02 09 10 109 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 DEVICE PROPERTY SETS A separate device parameter set Property Set can be assigned to each source device in a feed destination relationship This permits a source device to have different settings I O timing etc depending on the destination device Examples are mixers with multiple doors or a scale with two sets of discharge gates each going to a different mixer or truck lane Property set records are added modified or deleted from the FEED DESTINATIONS screen Procedures for performing these functions are given after the following screen example Feed Destinations Screen showing Property Sets Plant Name ffl LLLLLLLLLL LLLLLLLLLL LLLLLLLLLL ADDING A NEw PROPERTY SET 1 Goto PLANT SETUP FEED DESTINATIONS and arrow down to the row containing the desired source device 2 Press F4 The system creates a property set device record by making a copy of the source device record and
266. rsday March 23 2000 8816 03 23 2000 100 10 FORENSIC PRODUCT LOAD LOAD BATCH UNIT CHARGE Ticket Totals Discount NUMBER DATE 8817 03 23 2000 10 FORENSIC PRODUCT LOAD LOAD BATCH UNIT CHARGE yd bag Ticket Totals Discount Tax Ticket Total Total NUMBER DATE 8818 03 23 2000 100 10 FORENSIC PRODUCT LOAD LOAD BATCH UNIT CHARGE yd bag Ticket Totals Discount Report Totals Discount END OF REPORT 02 09 10 264 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 VOI DED TICKETS No tickets were voided on March 23 2000 Thursday March 23 2000 EER VOIDED TICKETS REPORT URN for Thursday March 23 2000 thru Thursday March 23 2000 Sequence Customer Order Plant Number Code Code Code END OF REPORT 02 09 10 265 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 TICKETS BY CUSTOMER Only part of the report is shown Thursday 2000 March 23 xk for thru CUSTOMER ORDER TICKET LISTING 12 18 AR Thursday March 23 March 23 2000 Thursday 2000 TOMER NAME Evans Building Supply ESS TOMER ADD CUSTOMER CODE Evans ORDER CODE 1 ECT CODE BY ORDER TICKET NUMBER 8816 03 23 2000 100 8817 03 23 2000 8818 03 23 2000 100 ORDER TOTALS CUSTOMER TOTALS PLA LOAD SIZE UNIT TAX CHARGE 01 01 01 1900 1900 00 yd 00 yd 00 yd TEA 0 00 27 00 TOMER NAME LINDSE
267. rst DOS Floppy Second DOS Floppy First DOS Hard Disk Second DOS Hard Disk QNX Directory Winlink Directory USB Removable Device BSOUAm gt Select the appropriate drive and press ENTER The cursor moves to the Start Date field Select the Start Date The default is today s date You can browse for dates with batch weights Press ENTER The cursor moves to the End Date field Select the End Date The default is today s date You can browse for dates with batch weights Press ENTER The cursor moves to the Mat File Script field 276 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 5 02 09 10 Enter the material file script file where batch weights data is stored in the Spectrum The default is mat_file x To export load level batch weights enter mat_file_by_load x Press ENTER The cursor moves to the File Name field Enter the name of the file to which batch weights will be exported The default is mat_rec dat Press ENTER The cursor moves to the Directory field Remember DOS file names can only have 8 characters a period then a 3 character extension Enter the directory to which batch weights will be copied The default is the 3 letter abbreviation for the current day of the week e g Tue Note The browse list lets you choose from a list of 3 letter abbreviations for days of the week Press ENTER The cursor moves to the Full Path and File Name field If you want to use another file path and name
268. s ENTER The cursor moves to the File Name field Enter the name of the file to which tickets will be exported The default is ticket dat Remember DOS file names can only have 8 characters a period then a 3 character extension Press ENTER The cursor moves to the Directory field Enter the directory to which ticket files will be copied The default is the 3 letter abbreviation for the current day of the week e g Tue NOTE The browse list lets you choose from a list of 3 letter abbreviations for days of the week Press ENTER The cursor moves to the Full Path and File Name field If you want to use another file path and name besides the ones specified in the Directory and File Name fields enter it here Press F1 to export the tickets 289 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 EXPORT BATCH WEIGHTS TO QC HELPER Note Before you transfer data to a USB removable device make sure the device has been set up formatted and connected as described in the document Data Transfer From To a USB Device This utility lets you transfer batch weight information to Command Alkon s QC Helper to a Microsoft Windows quality control program or to a QNX formatted floppy disk of USB removable device Export Batch Weights Drive Start Date End Date Mat File Script File Name Directory Full Path and File Name To EXPORT BATCH WEIGHTS 1 Select MAIN MENU SYSTEM MAINTENANCE DISK UTILITIES EXPORT
269. s is accomplished as follows 1 Select MAIN MENU SYSTEM MAINTENANCE PRINTER SETUP A blank PRINTER SETUP screen appears with the cursor on the Node Number field 2 Press F2 to pull up a list of nodes Select the appropriate node and press ENTER 3 Inthe Ticket Script Name s field enter w to print batch weights or leave this field blank to print one set of batch weights for the entire load 4 Press F1 to save the data SELECTING BATCH WEIGHT I TEMS FOR PRINTING The information printed in the batch weights section of the ticket or on batch weight reports is selected on the Batch Weight Options screen shown next which is accessed by pressing F3 from the System Maintenance Printer Setup screen To select an option move the cursor to that line and type a Y over the N Be sure to press F1 to save your selections For a description of the more common batch weight information see Batch Weights Batch Weight Options Page 1 Plant Code l Summary Header Info i t Print Load Total weight Material Names Print Mix Design Total water 02 09 10 Mix Design Amount Net Target Amount Net Batched Amount Net Variance Amount Net Variance Percent Actual Target Amount Actual Batched Amount Actual Variance Amount Actual Variance Percent Material Moisture Percent Actual water Amount Material Effectiveness Factor Material Substitution Factor Print Water In Truck Amoun
270. s is done on the SCALES screen 2 pages shown next On this screen you can add a scale or edit parameters for an existing one NOTE If you are setting up a serial scale see the External Serial Device Setup Guide for instructions As with many Spectrum screens you can go directly to other related screens from this one For instance you can press F4 to go to the I O Assignments screen or F5 to go to the Bins screen Scales Screen SCALES AGGREGATE Keyboard Hol Display Grou Display Orde Code AGG SCALE Grad Unit 20 00 lb Capacity 50000 00 lb Allow Early Feed Y Flow Control Enabled Y Maximum Flow Rate Minimum Flow Rate Alt Bin After 0 Sec Flow Under Vibrator On If Flow Below Flow Start Delay Open Time At Start Close Time At Start Name 350 00 lb 100 00 1b 0 lb 20 00 1b 2 00 Sec 0 30 Sec 0 00 Sec 100 00 lb 140 00 lb 40 00 lb Scale Empty Zero Tolerance Over Zero Tolerance Under Turn Vibrator On 750 00 lb Gate Wide Open 750 00 lb Scales Screen SCALES 2 Time between Flow Calculation Upda Flow based on llb Ho Plus 0 Maximum Flow Rate for Based on Sca Score Board Port Serial Scale Port I Open2 Time At Start Close2 Time At Start save Page A 10 02 09 10 85 Page 1 INPUTS HOLD DISCH AGG CLOSED OUTPUTS AGG OPEN AGG CLOSE RGG VIB Hold Disch d 1 Gate Closed p 1 e al Gate Open Gate Close Vibrator Gate2 Open Gate
271. s not unique within the system only unique within a given day Customer Customer for which the order was placed Project Project if any from which the order was generated Mix Code Mix code ordered Each order can have only one mix code Ordered Amount of the mix design that was ordered You may add a after the number to designate that a finish load is needed Slump Ordered slump of the mix design Load Size Load size for the order Notes Any notes entered from a project customer or manually by the order entry person 02 09 10 180 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 DESCRIPTION Consistence For EN 206 users this field contains the EN 206 Consistence Class S1 S2 etc or Slump in millimeters This information defaults in from the mix design and onto tickets for the order On Job Time Time that the first load is to arrive on the job This field adds travel and waiting times when posted on the ORDER INDEX even if the times are equal to zero Spacing Time Amount of time between loads requested by the customer May be entered from a project or manually by the order entry person Ext Description Truck Type Browseable field of valid truck types from the truck database Use this field only to limit the type of truck that can deliver the concrete Order Status Browseable field order statuses Valid entries are e N Normal firm e C Cancell
272. s shown next Ticket Browse Window Ticket Number Load Status 1 00 09 48 g d BATCH SETUP 09 32 00 yd JOHNSON BUILDER 11 25 gt yd JOHNSON BUILDER 0 12 06 P j yd JOHNSON BUILDER Loaded Finish Pour Grand Total Tickets whose truck codes have not been verified are displayed with a P just to the right of the Time column Also there is a 0 in the Ticket Number column for these tickets 5 Arrow down to the appropriate ticket and press ENTER The ticket appears on the Edit Ticket screen as shown next 02 09 10 204 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 02 09 10 Ticket with No Truck Ticket Number Load Status Ticket IDI Time Voided TruckI Customer Code Customer Name Project Code Project Name Order Code Address PO Number Notes Plant 01 Returned Concrete Allowed Tax Zone Leave Plant Batch Code Y Arrive Job Print Prices Start Pour Previous Total C 0 D Finish Pour Grand Total 6 The cursor should be on the Truck field in the upper right hand corner of the screen Press F2 to pull up a list of trucks 7 Arrow down to the appropriate truck code and press ENTER The new code appears in the Truck field and the cursor moves to the P just to the right of the Truck field 8 Type Y over the P then press F1 to save the changes As soon as you press F1 the ticket prints 9 Repeat steps 2 through
273. s typically 1 0 gl yd for US systems Water Amount per Mix Unit is typically 5 0 L m3 for Metric systems Example To go from a default 3 inch slump to a 5 inch slump using the slump table above two steps amounting to a two inch change would be involved We would add 100 percent for the 1 inch step to the 80 percent for the 2 inch step resulting in a sum of 180 Calculated by multiplying change per step 1 inch by the Slump Factor for water 1 0 gl in from Ingredients screen Calculated by multiplying change per step 25 mm by the Slump Factor for water 20 L mm from Ingredients screen Example 1 Example 2 02 09 10 Default slump is 3 and we want a 5 slump We would be adding 2 of slump Using our US slump table and starting from the Default row we can see that two steps would be involved the 1 step and the 2 one Water to Add Water Amt per Mix Unit Sum of Percentages 100 Water to Add 100 for 1 step 80 for 2 step 1 0 100 180 1 0 100 1 8 gl Default slump is 75mm and we want a 125mm slump We would be adding 50mm of slump Using our Metric slump table and starting from the Default row we can see that two steps would be used the 25mm step and the 50mm one Water to Add Water Amt per Mix Unit Sum of Percentages 100 Water to Add 100 for 25mm step 80 for 50mm step 5 0 100 180 5 0 100 180 05 9 0L 73 Spectrum
274. s you override the error pop and use the returned concrete even though it is incompatible LANGUAGE CONFIGURATION Language Either English or Spanish Currency Date Either US_Dollar or Peso Date format Either MMDDYY US or DDMMYY European 02 09 10 120 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 FIELD DESCRIPTION Allow Link Mix This flag is used with COMMANDbatch and should be Conversion set to Y so that Ulink converts amounts on the COMMANDbatch ticket load to match Spectrum s units Default Units Either YD for cubic yards or M3 for cubic meter Test Mix Mix code used for test purposes Washout Mix Mix code used for truck washout TRANSIENT RECORDS Keep Batch Weights Default number of days to keep batch weights Batch weights older than this are deleted Keep Ticket Load Default number of days to keep ticket records Ticket records older than this are deleted Information Keep Batch Default number of days to keep batch records Batch Information records older than this are deleted Keep Drop Records Default number of days to drop records for debugging purposes Drop records older than this are deleted Keep Incoming Default number of days to keep incoming inventory records Incoming inventory records older than this are Records deleted Quick Ticket to Load Yes No field that sets whether to display quick tickets Index on the
275. sed on the value entered in the Slump field If you increased the slump value the water target increases If you decreased the slump value the water target decreases A red appears directly to the right of the Slump field to indicate that this field was manually changed Note The amount of change in the water target depends on whether standard slump calculations or slump tables are used To Change In Truck Water Volume 1 On the BATCH SETUP screen press TAB until the In Truck field is highlighted 2 Type the total number of gallons that the truck is carrying from the last washout and press ENTER The water target automatically decreases To Adjust Water Trim on a Per Yard Basis 02 09 10 196 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 1 On the BATCH SETUP screen press TAB until the Trim gl yd field 1s highlighted 2 Type either a positive or a negative amount in this field A positive amount increases the water for each yard by the amount entered in this field A negative amount decreases the water in the same manner Example If you enter a 1 in this field for a 10 yard load the water target is increased by 10 gallons To Adjust Water on a Per Load Basis 1 On the BATCH SETUP screen press TAB until the Trim gl Load field is highlighted 2 Type either a positive or a negative amount in this field A positive amount increases the water for the load by the amount entered in this field A negative
276. sesecsesscsseescsscsscssesssesecssesscsscesessesssesecsessseaees 151 E Erelds Plants en lt ido 155 A AAA E A LOO OVERVIEW OF SPECTRUM INVENTORY FUNCTIONS Bs FURCHON REVS dre INGREDIENT INVENTORY LEVELS ALL PLANTS o UR CHON KE ica INGREDIENT USAGE DATA ALL PLANTS ccccsccccccecsessseceecceceessaececececsesesecesececeesessaeceeeeecsensaaeaeeecs RECORDING INCOMING INVENTORY INGREDIENTS 6 FUNCHON Kei e CLEARING INVENTOR Yi da OA AAA spveesseventes LOD Fields User Setup Screen ccccccccsssssscsesesesesesesesesesescstncscnssseseseseseseassseeeeneceeseseseseaeaeseseaeeneeeetees 166 USER SECURITY A E EEEE dace E E EES EEEE E E a iaa 168 Batching Operations sidra decada L70 TASH HeT BIBIEH N LONE EREE E EREE TEEN EE EOE TEE E L EE SA leed Be aa ta Go Batching Cycle A A tsi R NAE Ss Pre E E A A dl ed T ell li Feed Types me Fast Feed 00006 me Timed Feed er JOS Fi Hee A AA A AA AS SS MULTE GLC A E fog co eg SSR apace E Te RE gd Gs BN Diles as Y Feed Sequencing Discharge Cycle BASIC STEPS FOR AUTOMATIC BATCHING SCREENS USED FOR AUTOMATIC BATCHING Order Index and Load Index Screens me Pi lds Order Md AS IE we Functi n Keys Order Ide hence ect E So ce State ened ans E EAE eens RA E ed Fields Load Index mw Functi n Keys Load Index ivcscccccascccctescenesesasaccrnsesactucansvnccetacsaveceeasuuecescenizcondunvesances
277. sh order This can be pulled in from either the customer or project file Print Price Indicates if pricing will print on tickets generated for this order This can be pulled in from either the customer or project file Y or B value Y instructs the system to print batch weights Batch Code on tickets for this order B instructs the system to refrain from printing batch weights on tickets for this order Customer Customer name contact name contact and phone number Name Info are automatically inserted from the customer file Returned Mix Indicates whether concrete can be returned to the plant for Allowed this mix design Mix The mix design ordered by the customer is displayed in this area Resale products can also be entered in this area Ordered Total amount ordered for each product is entered in this field Size Load size for this mix design For resale products this is the amount to be delivered with each load Delivered As products are delivered the system updates this field with the total amount delivered Description Description of the product Automatically entered but can be changed if needed mw FUNCTION KEYS FUNCTION KEY F1 Save Saves data you have entered or changed F2 Browse Pulls up a list of possible entries Browseable fields have these brackets F3 Times Pulls up a box so you can change Order Times travel waiting un
278. so user defined on the SYSTEM MAINTENANCE SYSTEM DEFAULTS screen UDF 3 This user defined field may contain up to 20 characters The field label is also user defined on the SYSTEM MAINTENANCE SYSTEM DEFAULTS screen Tax Zone Tax zone from the customer record for the customer attached to the project End Date Expiration date of the project Last Date Last date this project was assigned to an order and ticketed Mix Mix design quoted for the project You can also enter resale products here Projected Number of units projected to complete the project for each product Delivered System generated sum of the number of units delivered for each product Slump Default slump assigned to each mix design Description Description of each product 02 09 10 66 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 FUNCTION KEYS FUNCTION KEY F1 Save Saves data you have entered or changed F2 Browse Pulls up a list of possible entries Browseable fields have these brackets F4 Pricing Displays the pricing for each product on the project You cannot change pricing through this function changes to products on the project You can also add or edit Consistence and Extended Description information required for EN 206 users F6 Cancel Shortcut key that enters C for cancelled quote in the Status field F7 Clear Cancels changes before you have saved them FS Delete Deletes the project record currentl
279. t Print Water to Add Print Water To Cement Ratio Include water to Add Amount in Water to Cement Ratio Include Temper Water Amount in Water to Cement Ratio Include Tare in Water to Cement Ratio Print Slump Print Adjust Water Print Trim Water Print Manual Auto Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 Batch Weight Options Page 2 Print Absorption Factor Print Absorbed water Print SSD Design Quantity Print Total Moisture Print Total water Print SSD Adjusted weights Print Ingredient Description Print Design Absorbed water Print Design SSD water Print MnDOT Labels amp Columns Print Specific Gravity Print Batched UOM Ticket Script Name s Print Scale Start amp End Tares Print Mixer Times Note The Print Batched UOM flag must be set to Y so that printed scale or meter values use the same UOM as their respective measuring devices This is a requirement for state inspections 02 09 10 147 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 BAR CODE PRINTING You can cause bar codes to be printed on tickets top portion by entering literal strings on the Ticket Layout Editor screen This feature uses the built in bar code support found in many printers The following table shows the Bar Code Types that can be printed on the OKI 320 Turbo 9 Pin dot matrix printer and on the Lexmark laser printer Bar Code OKI 320 Lexmark Max Data Prints Type Tu
280. t Feed a Safe Target is calculated based on the amount left to feed minus the Timed Feed Plant Erraticness percentage or absolute value Multiple Timed Feeds can occur up to the Maximum Number of Timed Feeds value gt JOG FEED Jog Feed is typically used for aggregates and cements and opens and closes the gate enough to allow small jog bites of material to fall through The time duration the gate opens and closes depends on the Jog Weight Jog Time and Jog Settle Time values The system automatically adjusts the Jog Time by the Jog Time Adjust value to achieve the Jog Weight per jog Jog Feed can start if ALL of the following are true Jog Feed is enabled Fast and or Timed Feed finishes without getting the material to target The Maximum Number of Jogs is a non zero value w POSSIBLE FEED CONFIGURATION Feeding occurs in the following order Fast Timed and Jog For bins with more than one gate the only gate that jogs is Gate 1 The other gates stop feeding when the Fast Feed cutoff value is reached 1 e when the scale weight equals Target Extra Gate Shutoff Preact Plant Erraticness The following sample Bins screen shows a possible configuration for an aggregate feed that uses two gates 02 09 10 82 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 Bins Screen with possible configuration for two gates Code I Material Monitor Enabled Feed Rate 1 Sec Moisture Probe N Keyboard Hold 1 Display Group 1
281. t it will be printed on the load ticket Consistence For EN 206 users this field contains the EN 206 Consistence Class S1 S2 etc or Slump in millimeters The line under this field contains the EN 206 Extended Description for the mix Information in these fields defaults in with the mix or order and defaults onto Tickets using the mix Quantity Read only field Quantity of resale products associated with this batch Product Description Read only field Description of resale products associated with this batch Function Key F1 Reprint Causes the last ticket generated to reprint You will be prompted to press F1 again to confirm F2 Browse Pulls up a list of possible entries Browseable fields have these brackets F3 Menu Takes you to a subset of the MAIN MENU which lets you go directly to the Material Overview screen or to other menus like Plant Setup and Data Entry 02 09 10 194 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 Function Key F4 Convert Displays amounts in the alternate units of measure US or Metric Does not change the units of measure set for the system however F5 Mixes Takes you to the MIX DESIGNS screen Press ESC to return to BATCH SETUP F6 Inventory Takes you to the ON HAND LEVELS BY PLANT screen Press ESC to return to BATCH SETUP F7 Clear Clears all information from the screen data ca
282. te to be fed before starting cement F1 Save To save data you have entered or changed F2 Browse To pull up a list of possible entries Browseable fields have these brackets F3 More To pull up a subset of the Bins or Scales screen depending on which field From or To is highlighted F4 Sequences To pull up the Sequences screen ES FD To pull up the Feed Destinations screen F6 Assign To pull up the Material Assignments screen F8 Other Moves the cursor to the Other devices and vice versa rr TO REASSI GN I NGREDIENTS 02 09 10 Select MAIN MENU PLANT SETUP MATERIAL OVERVIEW Arrow down to the desired ingredient and press F2 to pull up the list of ingredients Select the new ingredient and press ENTER The new ingredient appears in place of the old one Press F1 to save your changes 230 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 re TO ACTIVATE DEACTIVATE A DEVICE Select MAIN MENU PLANT SETUP MATERIAL OVERVIEW Arrow down to the row containing the desired device Tab over to the Active column Use the SPACE BAR to toggle the value to either Y for activate or N for deactivate Press F1 to save your changes w TO CHANGE FEED AND DISCHARGE PARAMETERS 02 09 10 Select MAIN MENU PLANT SETUP MATERIAL OVERVIEW Arrow down to the row containing the desired device For changing feed parameters Tab over to the From column
283. ted inventory period I NGREDIENT USAGE DATA ALL PLANTS To view ingredient usage for all plants 1 Press F6 from either the ON HAND LEVELS BY PLANT or the DETAILED USAGE BY PLANT screen 2 Press SHIFT F4 to see usage data for the next inventory period Daily Weekly Monthly or Yearly 02 09 10 162 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 RECORDING I NCOMING I NVENTORY NGREDIENTS 02 09 10 NOTE To record incoming inventory of Resale Products see Resale Products To record incoming inventory 1 Select MAIN MENU DATA ENTRY UPDATE INVENTORY DAILY INVENTORY Move the cursor to the ingredient for which you wish to record incoming inventory Press F3 Incoming The screen shown next appears with the cursor on the Adjustment Amount field Incoming Inventory Total Batched Plant Ingredient 708773 1 Ib Location Adjustment Amount Supplier Name Receipt Number Truck Hauler JLLLLLLLLL LLLLLLLLLI JLLLLLLLLIL LLL Enter the amount of incoming inventory and any other pertinent information supplier truck hauler etc NOTE Ifthe On Hand Amount and Adjustment Amount fields do not show the correct inventory units press F3 to go to the INGREDIENTS screen where you can set the correct inventory units Press F1 to save your entry and update this ingredient s on hand amount Press ESC to go back to the inventory screen Repeat Steps 2 through 5 above for each i
284. tely to the remaining ingredient targets in the mix design Slump Factor Used for determining the water amount per mix unit cubic yard or meter per 1 inch or 1 mm for slump calculations Typically this value is 1 0 for US systems and 20 for Metric 02 09 10 40 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 FIELD DESCRIPTION Specific Gravity Specific gravity for the material Used for calculating the mix design s yield on the MIX DESIGNS screen Also used in slurry calculations Quality control personnel normally provide this number Plant Code Default home plant of the current user This is not editable Over Tolerance Allowable percentage of over tolerance amount based on the entry units for the plant When calculating over tolerance situations the system uses either the material or plant over tolerance setting whichever is greater This field instructs the system when to flag the amount Under Tolerance Allowable percentage of under tolerance amount based on the entry units for the plant When calculating under tolerance situations the system uses either the material or plant under tolerance setting whichever is greater This field instructs the system when to flag the amount Finished Percentage of under or over target the system will allow for batch completion of this ingredient Typically this is one half the under tolerance value Used mainly for speed in split batching
285. termine amounts for the entire load Second Group Second Group First Group x Moisture Percent Used when moisture probes and manually entered moisture values use SSD weights where moisture of the material is handled as free water 126 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 1 Load Size One Second Group Second Group First 1 Moisture Used when moisture probes and manually entered moisture values use Oven Dry weights where the difference between the moisture and absorption determine the free water for the material N No Load Size First Group First Group x 1 00 Used for skipping the load size calculation for a group R Return Concrete First Group First Group Factor Amount Used when a returned mix contains materials that can be used in the next load Typically pertains to the 2 CEM group S Slump First Group First Group Change in Slump x Slump Factor Used to accommodate changes in slump caused by modifying the amount of water or aggregates T Trim First Group First Group Load Size x Trim Factor Used to automatically trim a material or admix design on Batch Setup Water can also be trimmed per yard and per load U Slurry Solids Second Group Second Group First Group x Total Solids Used to adjust for the amount of the solids in a slurry mix Each solids group to be adjusted must be listed on a separate row X Combination Combination of Based On and Correction Calculat
286. the bottom of the screen when the order is transferred to the Batch Setup screen User Defined This is a free form entry field and is used for informational purposes only Account Balance Current customer account balance System generated based on the tickets generated for this customer code Tax Zone Returned Concrete Allowed Tax zone applicable for this customer This browseable field must contain an entry from the Sales Tax Rates table Yes or No field that specifies whether returned concrete could be shipped to this customer Controls all returned concrete activity for this customer C O D Yes or No field that specifies whether this customer is a cash or credit customer Print Prices Yes or No field that specifies whether prices will print on tickets generated for this customer Contact Name Name of contact person at the customer location Phone Number Telephone number of the contact person Notes Address Address line 1 Address Address line 2 P O Box P O Box number when applicable City City of the customer State County Either the state or county of the customer Zip Postal Code Zip or postal code of the customer Any notes you wish to attach to the customer account FUNCTION KEYS FUNCTION KEY F1 Save Saves data you have entered or changed F2 Browse P
287. tilization and Current Orders 02 09 10 25 Spectrum Menu Structure MAIN MENU Customers Edit Tickets Update Inventory gt Ingredients Mix Designs Resale Products Orders Projects Sales Tax Rates Trucks Concrete Calculator Batchbook Base Mix Batchbook Cement Mix Admix Designs Edit MVM Description BATCH SETUP LOAD INDEX DISPATCH DATA ENTRY gt Batch Wt Reports gt Inventory Reports gt Ingredient Listing Mix Design Listing MixSummary Rpt Customer Listing Order Reports gt Project Reports gt Resale Products Listing Ticket Reports gt gt o Fleet Utilization Manual Material Monitor Sequence Listing Cancel Report ORDER INDEX REPORTS ENDOF DAY Material Oveview Bins amp Silos Scales Decumulative Scales Metered Liquids gt e gt gt Admixture Bottles Holding Tanks Conveyor Belts Extra Devices Events Truck Device Mixers Material Assignments Sequences Feed Destinations I O Assignments Junction Box Test Exercise l O Readout Display Scale Meter I O Quick Edit QUIT SPECTRUM USER LOGIN NOTES 02 09 10 User Login Daily Inventory Weekly Inventory Monthly Inventory Yearly Inventory Display Batch Weights Batch Weights by Date Batch Weights by Load Incoming Inventory Mat Usage by Material Mat Usage by Plant Material Usage by Bin Mx Inventory Resale Prod Inventory Pro
288. tolerance and that the operator did not press F6 Retry from the error pop to re read the scale Minus Indicates that the material went under tolerance and that the operator did not press F6 Retry from the error pop to re read the scale Greater Than gt Indicates that the material went over tolerance and that the operator pressed F6 Retry at least once from the error pop but the value re read from the scale was still out of tolerance Less Than lt Indicates that the material went under tolerance and that the operator pressed F6 Retry at least once from the error pop but the value re read from the scale was still out of tolerance 02 09 10 214 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 EDITING TICKET DATA From the Edit Ticket screen you can edit everything to be printed on the ticket except for batch weights Procedures for editing tickets are given next 1 Select MAIN MENU DATA ENTRY EDIT TICKETS A blank EDIT TICKET screen appears with the cursor on the Date field Edit Ticket Screen Ticket Number Load Status Ticket ID Time voided Truck Customer Code Customer Name Project Code Project Name order Code L Address PO Number Notes Disp Plant Returned Concrete Allowed Tax Zone L Leave Plant Batch Code EJ Arrive Job Print Prices Start Pour Previous Total Finish Pour Grand Total 2 Make sure the Date field shows the correct date defaults to
289. tore from Hard Disks A ees SER ie 284 BATCH WEIGHTS BACKUP amp RESTORE derie dnde SEEE NENES 286 S To Backup Batch Weights 0 T E EE OE E E CE Redes 286 To Restore Batch Weights c cccsccssccsssssesesesssssesesesessssnssseseseseseseseseseseeseseeceeeeeeseseseseaenensanenseaeas 287 EXPORT TICKETS TO DOS FILE AE E EE E E T A 288 To Export Ticket Data coacciones 288 EXPORT BATCH WEIGHTS TO QC HELPER cc sccessesceceessececseececeesececsesaececssseeeecseeeceesaeeecsssaeeeeneseeeneaee 290 02 09 10 8 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 To Export Batch Weights c cccccsssssssessseseesesesesesesssessssesesesesesssesesesseeeeceeeeseseseaesenenenenenenseaeas 290 FORMAT DISKS narnii AEn o AERA EEAS ENEA AERAR EIA AAAA wove a args 292 S To Format a Floppy DIS A ae sed oR AR RARE 292 Y Formatting a USB Removable Device for QNX s ssssesssssssssesssessssessseseeeseeceeeceeseseaeseaenenensnenseseas 293 Formatting a USB Removable Device for DOS ccccccccsscsssvsvsvsvsisesseeseseseseseseseseseneseneesnsnsesnaeas 293 IMPORT DATA ES etico cas 295 So To Import Mix Desierta titi na ni t CoA a tegen 295 idea nana aan aida 2 0 1 APPENDICES A E Z CAL MANUAL STATION B MOISTURE PROBE INSTALLATION C SPECTRUM SETUP FOR STATE INSPECTIONS D MIX DESIGN POLYNOMIALS SETUP GUIDE 02 09 10 9 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 I NTRODUCTION Congratulations on your purchase of Command Alkon s Spectrum Batching System for you
290. ulls up a list of possible entries Browseable fields have these brackets F7 Clear Clears all data from the screen F8 Delete Deletes the entire record from the database make sure this is what you want to do You are prompted to press this key again to confirm 02 09 10 34 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 NGREDI ENTS Information about ingredients is stored in the ingredients database table Ingredients can be added edited and viewed on the INGREDIENTS screen To access this screen select MAIN MENU DATA ENTRY NGREDIENTS to view add and maintain ingredients in your inventory You may also access the INGREDIENTS screen directly from the MIX DESIGNS screen by pressing F3 after accessing MIX DESIGNS In either case the following screen appears Ingredients Screen Page 1 01 INGREDIENTS Code 1 CR GR INSTA CR GR Units Entry lb Based On Internal lb Inventory lb 1 Purchase lb Adjust 1b Trim gl Weight lb 1 To Volume gl 1 1 0000 Inventory Enable VY Minimum allowed in Mix 0 00 lb Use Positive Tare Cost Per lb 0 00 Maximum allowed in Hix 3000 00 lb Use Over Pos Tare Decimal Points 0 Minimum Auto Moisture 0 00 Use Negative Tare Hodify Flag Y Maximum Auto Moisture 2 00 Use Under Neg Tare Print Inventory Unit N Group Code Ticket Groupl Tracepoints N Auxiliary Group Aux2 Group I Check Negative Correction N Inventory Level N Record 02 as
291. ump Tables for more information Consistence This field contains the EN 206 Consistence Class S1 S2 etc or Slump in millimeters Ext Description This field is a concatenation of information about Strength Class Exposure Class Flow Class Maximum Aggregate Size and Cement Type For non EN 206 users this field can be blank or used for entering additional information FUNCTION KEYS FUNCTION KEY Sh F4 Return Mix Classes PURPOSE Pulls up a list of Mix Classes so authorized personnel can select which ones can be accepted as returned concrete against the mix design currently on the screen Mix classes are entered on the MIX CLASSES screen under SYSTEM MAINTENANCE Sh F5 Inventory Pulls up inventory data for the mix design The number of units batched loaded and resold are displayed for each inventory period 1 daily 2 weekly 3 monthly 4 yearly Sh F6 Global Mix Pulls up a change box so you can substitute one ingredient Change for another in all mixes See To Change an Ingredient in All Mixes later in this section F1 Save Saves data you have entered or changed F2 Browse Pulls up a list of possible entries Browseable fields have these brackets F3 Ingred Shortcut to the INGREDIENTS screen F4 Convert Displays the ingredient units of measure in the alternate units of measure US or Metric This function is useful if y
292. up process On screen messages tell you when the backup is started and completed t To RESTORE FROM HARD DISK 1 Select MAIN MENUSYSTEM MAINTENANCE DISK UTILITIES HARD DISK BACKUP amp RESTORE CAUTION You should only use the Restore operation when directed to do so by Command Alkon Support Services personnel 2 The cursor is on the Operation field with Backup as the default entry Select Restore from the browse list and press ENTER Press ENTER again to move the cursor to the Directory field 3 The default for the Directory field is Database Press ENTER to use this value The cursor moves to the Files field Or select Custom from the browse list and press ENTER Press ENTER again to move to the Files field 4 Select one of the following options from the browse list and press ENTER The entry appears in the Files field NOTE Ifyou select Custom in the Directory field the only thing you can select in the Files field is All e All e Data Files e Customers Mixes Ingredients 02 09 10 284 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 Orders e Projects e Trucks 5 Press ENTER to move to the Directory Name field if you need to change the path and restore file name default is usr spec db bak 6 Press F1 to start the restore process Follow the on screen instructions Other messages tell you what is going on e g purging old loads restore completed etc When the restore process is
293. ventory Monthly Inventory or Yearly Inventory Select the desired view The ON HAND LEVELS BY PLANT screen is displayed Press F5 Detail to pull up the DETAILED USAGE By PLANT screen shown next Detailed Usage By Plant Date and Time Last Cleared Plant 01 Total Batched LLLLLLLLL LLLLLLLLLL LLLLLLLLILL Jud LLLLLLLLLL Jul LLLLLLO LLLLLLLLIL LL Sh F4 to Toggle Period 161 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 FIELDS The Required field shows target weight totals for each ingredient for the selected inventory period The Auto Batched field shows the total system batched weight for each ingredient for the selected inventory period The Error field shows the total of the error percentage for each ingredient for the selected inventory period Error is the percentage auto batched over or under target The Manual field shows the totals manually batched for each ingredient for the selected inventory period FUNCTION KEYS FUNCTIONKEY PURPOSE F3 Adjust Allows you to adjust the Required and Auto Batched amounts for an ingredient NOTE To prevent unauthorized use all adjustments to inventory are recorded in the Incoming Inventory Log F4 Convert Displays amounts in the alternate units of measure Press this key again to return to the original units of measure F6 Sys Ttl Pulls up the USAGE BY MATERIAL screen which shows total ingredient usage for all plants for the selec
294. vice Disable Drop Records Yes No field that allows you to disable the dropping of records for the computer s learning process FAST FEED Allow Fast Feed Yes No field that allows prevents fast feed for this device Auger Feed This field should be set to Y if fast feed should only occur once during the feed cycle If this field is set to N multiple fast feeds can occur Allow Negative Yes No field that allows prevents negative preact values Preact to be used in preact calculations This is used mostly for pressurized cement feed systems where air pressure exerts force on the scale causing the scale to read an amount higher than what is actually on the scale Default Preact Preact value used by the computer when it first starts automatically adjusting the preact If there is a non zero value in the Preact Override field however that value is used instead of the one calculated by the computer 77 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 FIELD Preact Override DESCRIPTION Any non zero amount entered here is used as the preact instead of what is calculated by the computer Plant Erraticness This value takes into account variations in accuracy for fast feed It works with the Feed Rate and Preact to shut the gate early This amount is normally two scale graduations Minimum to Fast Feed Fast Feed begins 1f Fast Feed is enabled for the bin and the Safe Target is greater than the Minimu
295. when backup is complete rr TO BACK UP TO USB REMOVABLE DEVICE Note Before you back up to USB removable device make sure the device has been set up formatted and connected as described in the document Data Transfer From To a USB Device Procedures for backing up to a USB removable device are the same as those for backing up to floppy disk except that USB must be entered in the Drive field One benefit of using a USB removable device is increased storage capacity 02 09 10 281 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 RESTORES FROM FLOPPY DISK OR USB REMOVABLE DEVICE Note Before you restore from a USB removable device make sure the device has been set up formatted and connected as described in the document Data Transfer From To a USB Device The Restore function is used to restore lost data usually because of system failure You can restore data from either a floppy disk or USB removable device CAUTION You should only use the Restore operation when directed to do so by Command Alkon Support Services personnel w TO RESTORE FROM FLOPPY DISK 1 Select MAIN MENU SYSTEM MAINTENANCE DISK UTILITIES FLOPPY REMOVABLE MEDIA BACKUP amp RESTORE 2 The cursor is on the Operation field with Backup as the default entry Select Restore from the browse list and press ENTER Restore appears in the Operation field Press ENTER to move the cursor to the Drive field 3 The default value for the Drive f
296. where you would jog to less than 100 of the target If the system weighs up in fast feed and has to jog it jogs to the Finished short of the target Batch Calculation Type Tells the system whether to calculate the ingredient on an individual net basis or group cumulative basis based on the group code of the product Value is either C cumulative or N net The type chosen here must match the type chosen in the Tolerance Calculation Type field Tolerance Calculation Type Tells the system whether to issue a tolerance error for the ingredient on a net or cumulative basis based on the group code of the product Value is either C cumulative or N net The type chosen here must match the type chosen in the Batch Calculation Type field Sequence Priority Default is 0 When 0 is used the sequence priority on the mix design is used To globally increase the priority of an ingredient assign a number here The higher the number the higher the priority PAGE 2 INGREDIENTS SCREEN Purchase Inventory Weight to volume factor used for converting purchase Unit Factor units to inventory units Inventory Internal Weight to volume factor used for converting inventory Unit Factor units to internal calculation units 02 09 10 41 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 FIELD DESCRIPTION Specific Gravity of Specific gravity of the solids in the slurry water Used for Slurry Solids slurry cal
297. y displayed When FS Discount Pulls up a window so you can make pricing and discount prompted press this key again to confirm PROJECT PRICING Spectrum allows you to record custom pricing and or discounts for any product specified in a project To Adjust product pricing 1 Access or create the project 2 Add the product s to the project 3 Highlight the product for which you wish to set adjust pricing 4 Press F5 Discount As shown next the Discount Pricing window appears with the product code and projected quantity displayed at the top This information is used to calculate the projected total Discount Pricing Window Product Code 2054 gt esc Consistence Ext Desc Quantity 0 Discount is or Unit Price Extended Price List Price Discount Net Price Item Tax Total Product Taxable Y Order Tax Code 5507 Tax Rate 02 09 10 67 Spectrum User s Guide Ver 6 24 To apply a discount per unit 5 On the Discount is line Enter either the dollars per unit or the percentage and press ENTER If you enter dollars per unit the system calculates the percentage Similarly if you enter percentage the dollars per unit value is calculated To change the list price 6 On the List Price line enter the desired list price over the existing list price and press ENTER The system calculates new prices NOTE You are not limited to either changing the list price or givi

6.24 - Command Alkon User Gateway

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents